Download Print this page

Keysight M9421A User Manual

Keysight M9421A User Manual

Signal analyzers

Hide thumbs Also See for M9421A:

User & programmers manual (1175 pages)

,

User & programmers manual (3096 pages)

page of 2667

/ 2667
Bookmarks

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual

X-Series Signal Analyzers

WLAN Mode

E6680A E6680E E6681A E7515B

M9410A M9411A M9415A M9416A M9421A

M9410E M9411E M9415E M9416E

M8920A M8920B

N9000B N9010B N9020B N9021B N9030B N9032B N9040B N9041B N9042B

USER'S & PROGRAMMER'S REFERENCE

Advertisement

Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the M9421A and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Keysight M9421A

Page 1 X-Series Signal Analyzers WLAN Mode E6680A E6680E E6681A E7515B M9410A M9411A M9415A M9416A M9421A M9410E M9411E M9415E M9416E M8920A M8920B N9000B N9010B N9020B N9021B N9030B N9032B N9040B N9041B N9042B USER'S & PROGRAMMER'S REFERENCE...
Page 2 MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A to US government customers under its PARTICULAR PURPOSE. KEYSIGHT SHALL Keysight Technologies, Inc. as governed by standard commercial license, which is NOT BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR FOR United States and international copyright...
Page 3 X-Series Signal Analyzers WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference Table Of Contents WLAN ModeUser's & Programmer's Reference Table Of Contents 1 Documentation Roadmap 1.1 Products Covered by this Document 1.2 Additional Documentation 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1.1 Mode/Meas/View Dialog 2.1.1.1 Mode 2.1.1.2 Application Mode Remote Commands Application Mode Catalog Query (Remote Command Only) Current Application Model (Remote Command Only)
Page 4 Table Of Contents 2.3.1 Window Title 2.3.2 Measurement Data 2.3.3 Annotation Hotspot 2.4 Menu Panel 2.4.1 Right-Click Menu 2.4.1.1 Add to User Menu 2.4.1.2 Help on this setting 2.4.1.3 Show SCPI Command 2.4.1.4 Add to SCPI Recorder 2.4.1.5 Start/Stop SCPI Recorder 2.4.1.6 Show SCPI Recorder 2.4.2 User Menu 2.5 Cancel key...
Page 5 Table Of Contents 2.17.8 Use Case: Displaying Marker and Peak Tables 2.17.9 View Editor Remote Commands 2.18 Multiscreen 2.18.1 Select Screen 2.18.2 Screen List (Remote only command) 2.19 Fullscreen 3 WLAN Mode 3.1 Measurement Commands 3.2 Channel Power Measurement 3.2.1 Views 3.2.1.1 Normal 3.2.1.2 Carrier Info 3.2.2 Windows...
Page 6 Table Of Contents 3.2.3.4 Signal Path Presel Center Preselector Adjust Internal Preamp µW Path Control Allow Full Bypass in Auto Software Preselection SW Preselection Type SW Preselection BW High Freq Prefilter 3.2.4 BW 3.2.4.1 Settings Res BW Video BW RBW Filter Type 3.2.5 Display 3.2.5.1 Meas Display Bar Graph On/Off...
Page 7 Table Of Contents 3.2.7 Marker 3.2.7.1 Select Marker 3.2.7.2 Settings Marker Frequency Marker Mode Delta Marker (Reset Delta) Marker Settings Diagram All Markers Off 3.2.7.3 Peak Search Marker Frequency Peak Search Marker Delta 3.2.7.4 Properties Marker Frequency Relative To Marker Trace Marker Settings Diagram 3.2.8 Meas Setup 3.2.8.1 Settings...
Page 8 Table Of Contents 3.2.8.6 Global Global Center Freq Global EMC Std Restore Defaults 3.2.9 Sweep 3.2.9.1 Sweep/Control Sweep Time Minimum Acquisition Time Sweep/Measure Restart Pause/Resume Abort (Remote Command Only) Sweep Time Annotation (Remote Query Only) 3.2.9.2 Sweep Config Sweep Time Rules Points IF Dithering Image Protection...
Page 9 Table Of Contents 3.3.1.1 OBW Results 3.3.1.2 OBW Boundaries 3.3.1.3 Gate 3.3.2 Windows 3.3.2.1 Graph 3.3.2.2 Metrics - OBW Results 3.3.2.3 Metrics - OBW Boundaries 3.3.2.4 Gate 3.3.3 Amplitude 3.3.3.1 Y Scale Ref Value Scale/Div Scale Range Ref Position Auto Scaling 3.3.3.2 Attenuation Full Range Atten Mech Atten...
Page 10 Table Of Contents Res BW Video BW RBW Filter Type 3.3.5 Display 3.3.5.1 Meas Display x dB BW Boundaries On/Off Boundary Frequency 3.3.5.2 Annotation Graticule Screen Annotation Trace Annotation Control Annotation Meas Bar Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 3.3.5.3 View View User View Restore Layout to Default...
Page 11 Table Of Contents 3.3.7.4 Properties Marker Frequency Relative To Marker Trace Marker Settings Diagram 3.3.8 Meas Setup 3.3.8.1 Settings Avg/Hold Num Averaging On/Off Average Mode % of OBW Power Power Ref x dB Power Integration Method Spur Avoidance Meas Setup Summary Table Auto Couple Meas Preset Max Hold (Remote Command Only)
Page 12 Table Of Contents 3.3.10 Trace 3.3.10.1 Select Trace 3.3.10.2 Trace Control Trace Type Clear and Write | Restart Averaging | Restart Max/Min Hold View/Blank 3.3.10.3 Math Math Function Operand 1 / Operand 2 Offset Reference 3.3.10.4 Detector Detector Detector Select Auto/Man 3.3.10.5 Trace Function From Trace To Trace...
Page 13 Table Of Contents 3.4.13.1 Abs Pwr Freq 3.4.13.2 Rel Pwr Freq 3.4.13.3 Integrated Power 3.4.14 Windows 3.4.14.1 Graph Graph Window in Abs Pwr Freq View Graph Window in Rel Pwr Freq View Graph Window in Integrated Power View Graph Window in Carrier Info View 3.4.14.2 Table Table Window in Abs Pwr Freq View Table Window in Rel Pwr Freq View...
Page 14 Table Of Contents Software Preselection SW Preselection Type SW Preselection BW High Freq Prefilter 3.4.16 BW 3.4.16.1 Settings RBW Filter Type 3.4.17 Display 3.4.17.1 Meas Display Limit Lines 3.4.17.2 Annotation Graticule Screen Annotation Trace Annotation Control Annotation Meas Bar Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 3.4.17.3 View 3.4.18 Frequency 3.4.18.1 Settings...
Page 15 Table Of Contents Mask State Mask Standard Spur Avoidance Offset/Limits Config Table Offset (Bandwidth) Offset Freq Define Offset Detector Offset Average Type (Remote Command Only) Start Freq Stop Freq Res BW Meas BW Video BW VBW/RBW Offset (Sweep) Offset Freq Define Offset Detector Start Freq Stop Freq...
Page 16 Table Of Contents Start Freq Stop Freq Sweep Time Minimum Acquisition Time Sweep Time Annotation (Remote Query Only) Sweep Type Offset Side Start Freq Stop Freq Abs Start Abs Stop Rel Start Rel Stop Fail Mask Show Abs2 Limit Abs2 Start Abs2 Stop Fail Mask2 Meas Setup Summary Table...
Page 17 Table Of Contents Noise Floor Extension Enable Wideband IF for FFT 3.4.20.6 Global Global Center Freq Global EMC Std Restore Defaults 3.4.21 Sweep 3.4.21.1 Sweep/Control Sweep/Measure Restart Pause/Resume Abort (Remote Command Only) 3.4.21.2 X Scale Ref Value Scale/Div Ref Position Auto Scaling 3.4.21.3 Sweep Config Points...
Page 18 Table Of Contents 3.5.1 Views 3.5.1.1 Graph + Metrics 3.5.1.2 All Ranges 3.5.2 Windows 3.5.2.1 Graph 3.5.2.2 Table 3.5.2.3 All Range Table 3.5.2.4 Gate 3.5.2.5 Marker Table 3.5.3 Amplitude 3.5.3.1 Y Scale Ref Value Scale/Div Scale Range Ref Position Auto Scaling 3.5.3.2 Attenuation Full Range Atten Mech Atten...
Page 19 Table Of Contents 3.5.5 Display 3.5.5.1 Meas Display Center Frequency On/Off 3.5.5.2 Annotation Graticule Screen Annotation Trace Annotation Control Annotation Meas Bar Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 3.5.5.3 View Views Graph + Metrics All Ranges User View Restore Layout to Default Save Layout as New View Re-Save User View Rename User View...
Page 20 Table Of Contents Pk-Pk Search Marker Delta 3.5.7.4 Properties Marker Frequency Relative To Marker Trace Marker Settings Diagram 3.5.8 Meas Setup 3.5.8.1 Settings Avg/Hold Num Averaging On/Off Average Mode Average Type Meas Type Spur Range Spur Report Mode Range Settings Bandwidth Frequency Range Enabled...
Page 21 Table Of Contents Video BW Filter Type Attenuation IF Gain Detector/Sweep Frequency Range Enabled Start Freq Stop Freq Center Frequency Span Sweep Time Points Detector 1 Detector 2 Limits Frequency Range Enabled Start Freq Stop Freq Center Frequency Span Abs Start Limit Abs Stop Limit Peak Excursion Pk Threshold...
Page 22 Table Of Contents Sweep Time Rules 3.5.10 Trace 3.5.10.1 Select Trace 3.5.10.2 Trace Control Trace Type Clear and Write | Restart Averaging | Restart Max/Min Hold View/Blank 3.5.10.3 Math Math Function Operand 1 / Operand 2 Offset Reference 3.5.10.4 Trace Function From Trace To Trace Copy...
Page 23 Table Of Contents 3.6.2.3 EVM vs. Chips 3.6.2.4 Mag Error 3.6.2.5 Phase Error 3.6.2.6 I/Q Error Metrics 3.6.2.7 EVM vs. Symbol 3.6.2.8 EVM vs. Carrier 3.6.2.9 OFDM EVM Metrics 3.6.2.10 Demod Bits 3.6.2.11 Numeric Results 3.6.2.12 Burst Info 3.6.2.13 Signal Info U-Sig No 3.6.2.14 Preamble Freq Error 3.6.2.15 IQ Gain Imbalance...
Page 24 Table Of Contents 3.6.3.3 Range (Baseband Input models) Range Auto/Man I Range Q Range Q Same as I 3.6.3.4 Range (Non-attenuator models) Range Adjust Range for Min Clipping Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping Peak-to-Average Ratio Mixer Lvl Offset 3.6.3.5 Signal Path Presel Center Preselector Adjust Internal Preamp...
Page 25 Table Of Contents User View Listing Query 3.6.5.3 Annotation Graticule Screen Annotation Trace Annotation Control Annotation Meas Bar Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 3.6.6 Frequency 3.6.6.1 Settings Center Frequency Center Frequency Segment1 Center Frequency Segment2 CF Step 3.6.7 Marker 3.6.7.1 Select Marker 3.6.7.2 Settings Marker X Marker Mode...
Page 26 Table Of Contents Optimize EVM EVM Optimization Method Average Number for Iterative EVM Optimization (Remote Command Only) Spur Avoidance Auto Leveling Auto Couple Meas Preset 3.6.8.2 Radio Radio Std Detection Radio Std Modulation Format Subcarrier Spacing (Radio Std NOT 802.11b/g(DSSS/CCK/PBCC) or 802.11ax, 802.11be) Guard Interval Selection (Radio Std NOT 802.11b/g(DSSS/CCK/PBCC) or 802.11ax/be)
Page 27 Table Of Contents Equalizer Training 1018 I/Q Normalize 1019 Multi-Carrier Filter 1019 Spectrum 1020 Channel Estimation Filter 1020 Wiener Normalized Delay Spread 1021 Triangle Filter Length 1022 Eq Training Using L-LTF 1022 Chip Rate 1023 Descramble 1023 Equalizer 1024 Reference Filter 1025 Reference Filter Alpha/BT 1025...
Page 28 Table Of Contents 12 Mbits/s RMS EVM 1045 18 Mbits/s RMS EVM 1046 24 Mbits/s RMS EVM 1046 36 Mbits/s RMS EVM 1047 48 Mbits/s RMS EVM 1047 54 Mbits/s RMS EVM 1048 Freq Error 1048 Clock Error 1048 I/Q Offset (Center Freq Leakage, CFL) 1049 RMS EVM 1050...
Page 29 Table Of Contents Select Highlighted Analyzer 1079 Release Highlighted Analyzer 1080 Release All (Remote Command Only) 1081 Delete Highlighted Analyzer 1081 Delete All 1081 Query Analyzer Information (Remote Command Only) 1082 Query All Analyzer IP Addresses (Remote Query Only) 1082 Query remote analyzer MIMO capability (Remote Query Only) 1082 3.6.8.11 Tx Beam Forming Type (Remote Command Only)
Page 30 Table Of Contents 3.7.2.6 Stream Results Summary 1133 3.7.2.7 Channel Results Summary 1134 3.7.2.8 Spectral Flatness 1134 3.7.2.9 Channel Matrix 1134 3.7.2.10 Frequency Response 1134 3.7.2.11 Equalizer Impulse Response 1134 3.7.2.12 SEM Summary 1135 3.7.2.13 User Information Summary (11be) 1135 3.7.2.14 User Information Summary (11ac/n) 1135 3.7.2.15 Unused Tone Error...
Page 31 Table Of Contents 3.7.4 Amplitude 1145 3.7.4.1 Y Scale 1145 Ref Value 1145 Scale/Div 1146 Ref Position 1146 Auto Scaling 1147 3.7.4.2 Range (Non-attenuator models) 1148 Range 1148 Adjust Range for Min Clipping 1148 Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping 1149 Peak-to-Average Ratio 1149 Mixer Lvl Offset 1150...
Page 32 Table Of Contents EHT SIG No 1179 3.7.6.3 Annotation 1179 Graticule 1179 Screen Annotation 1180 Trace Annotation 1180 Control Annotation 1181 Meas Bar 1181 Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 1181 3.7.7 Frequency 1183 3.7.7.1 Settings 1183 Center Frequency 1183 Center Frequency Segment1 1183 Center Frequency Segment2 1184...
Page 33 Table Of Contents Meas Setup Summary Table 1199 Stream Selection 1200 Stream Number 1201 Spur Avoidance 1201 Auto Leveling 1203 Auto Couple 1204 Meas Preset 1206 3.7.9.2 Radio 1206 Radio Std Detection 1206 Radio Std 1207 Modulation Format 1208 Subcarrier Spacing (Radio Std NOT 802.11b/g(DSSS/CCK/PBCC) or 802.11ax, 802.11be) 1210 Guard Interval Selection (Radio Std NOT 802.11b/g(DSSS/CCK/PBCC) or...
Page 34 Table Of Contents Multi-Carrier Filter 1244 Spectrum 1244 Channel Estimation Filter 1245 Wiener Normalized Delay Spread 1246 Triangle Filter Length 1246 Eq Training Using L-LTF 1247 Data Decode 1247 Detect Non-HT PPDU 1248 3.7.9.6 IQ Comp 1248 Subcarrier I/Q Estimation 1248 I/Q Compensation 1249...
Page 35 Table Of Contents Edit 11ax/be Limit 1269 Relative Constellation Error in common 1269 Relative Constellation Error in trigger-based PPDU > max power of MCS7 1271 Relative Constellation Error in trigger-based PPDU power <= max power of MCS7 1273 MCS of Trigger-based PPDU 1275 DCM of Trigger-based PPDU 1276...
Page 36 Table Of Contents Restart 1297 Pause/Resume 1300 3.7.10.2 X Scale 1300 Ref Value 1300 Scale/Div 1301 Ref Position 1302 Auto Scaling 1303 3.7.10.3 Recording 1303 3.7.10.4 Playback 1304 Playback Mode 1305 Playback Start 1306 Playback Stop 1307 Step Forward 1307 Sample Rate 1308 3.7.11 Trace...
Page 37 Table Of Contents Peak-to-Average Ratio 1335 Mixer Lvl Offset 1336 3.8.2.4 Signal Path 1336 Presel Center 1336 Preselector Adjust 1338 Internal Preamp 1339 1340 µW Path Control 1342 Allow Full Bypass in Auto 1351 Software Preselection 1352 SW Preselection Type 1353 SW Preselection BW 1354...
Page 38 Table Of Contents 3.8.6.3 Peak Search 1378 Marker Time 1378 Peak Search 1381 Marker Delta 1381 3.8.6.4 Properties 1381 Marker Time 1381 Relative To 1384 Marker Trace 1385 Marker Settings Diagram 1385 3.8.7 Meas Setup 1386 3.8.7.1 Settings 1386 Avg|Hold Number 1386 Average Type 1387...
Page 39 Table Of Contents 3.8.9.1 Trace Control 1407 Max Hold Trace 1407 Min Hold Trace 1408 3.9 Spectral Flatness Measurement 1409 3.9.1 Views 1415 3.9.2 Windows 1416 3.9.2.1 Trace 1416 3.9.2.2 Metrics 1416 3.9.3 Amplitude 1417 3.9.3.1 Y Scale 1417 Ref Value 1417 Scale/Div 1418...
Page 40 Table Of Contents High Freq Prefilter 1461 3.9.4 BW 1462 3.9.4.1 Settings 1463 Info BW 1463 RBW Filter Type 1464 3.9.5 Display 1465 3.9.5.1 Meas Display 1465 Limit Lines 1465 3.9.5.2 Views 1465 3.9.5.3 Annotation 1466 Graticule 1466 Screen Annotation 1466 Trace Annotation 1467...
Page 41 Table Of Contents Marker Settings Diagram 1488 3.9.8 Meas Setup 1488 3.9.8.1 Settings 1489 Avg|Hold Number 1489 Averaging Mode 1489 Search Length 1490 Symbol Timing Adjustment 1490 Sync Training Sequence 1491 Equalizer Training 1492 Evaluation Option 1493 Meas Setup Summary Table 1493 Auto Couple 1493...
Page 42 Table Of Contents Pause/Resume 1532 3.9.9.2 X Scale 1533 Ref Value 1533 Scale/Div 1534 Ref Position 1535 Auto Scaling 1535 3.9.9.3 Recording 1535 3.9.9.4 Playback 1536 Playback Mode 1537 Playback Start 1538 Playback Stop 1539 Step Forward 1540 Sample Rate 1540 3.9.10 Trace 1540...
Page 43 Table Of Contents Mixer Lvl Offset 1570 3.10.3.5 Signal Path 1570 Presel Center 1571 Preselector Adjust 1572 Internal Preamp 1573 1575 µW Path Control 1576 Allow Full Bypass in Auto 1585 Software Preselection 1586 SW Preselection Type 1588 SW Preselection BW 1588 High Freq Prefilter 1589...
Page 44 Table Of Contents Marker Mode 1608 Delta Marker (Reset Delta) 1609 Marker Settings Diagram 1610 All Markers Off 1610 Couple Markers 1610 3.10.7.3 Properties 1610 Marker X-Axis Value 1610 Relative To 1611 Marker Trace 1611 Marker Settings Diagram 1612 3.10.8 Meas Setup 1612 3.10.8.1 Settings 1612...
Page 45 Table Of Contents 3.11.1.1 Normal 1628 3.11.2 Windows 1629 3.11.2.1 Spectrum 1629 3.11.3 Amplitude 1631 3.11.3.1 Y Scale 1631 Ref Value 1631 Scale/Div 1631 Scale Range 1632 Ref Position 1633 Auto Scaling 1633 3.11.3.2 Attenuation 1634 Full Range Atten 1636 Mech Atten 1637 Elec Atten...
Page 46 Table Of Contents 3.11.5.2 View 1678 View 1678 User View 1679 Restore Layout to Default 1679 Save Layout as New View 1680 Re-Save User View 1680 Rename User View 1680 Delete User View 1681 Delete All User Views 1681 View Editor Remote Commands 1681 View Listing Query 1681...
Page 47 Table Of Contents Marker Frequency 1704 Marker Function 1704 Band Span 1704 Band Left 1705 Band Right 1705 3.11.8 Meas Setup 1706 3.11.8.1 Settings 1706 Avg|Hold Num 1706 Averaging On/Off 1706 Average Mode 1707 Spur Avoidance 1707 Meas Setup Summary Table 1708 Auto Couple 1708...
Page 48 Table Of Contents 3.11.10.3 Detector 1737 Detector 1737 Detector Select Auto/Man 1738 3.12 IQ Waveform Measurement 1740 3.12.1 Views 1742 3.12.1.1 RF Envelope 1742 3.12.1.2 I/Q Waveform 1743 3.12.2 Windows 1743 3.12.2.1 RF Envelope 1743 3.12.2.2 Metrics 1744 3.12.2.3 I/Q Waveform 1744 3.12.3 Amplitude 1745...
Page 49 Table Of Contents µW Path Control 1778 Allow Full Bypass in Auto 1787 Software Preselection 1788 SW Preselection Type 1790 SW Preselection BW 1790 High Freq Prefilter 1791 3.12.4 BW 1792 3.12.4.1 Settings 1793 Digital IF BW 1793 Filter Type 1795 Filter BW 1797...
Page 50 Table Of Contents All Markers Off 1817 Couple Markers 1817 3.12.7.3 Peak Search 1817 Marker Time 1818 Peak Search 1818 Next Peak 1818 Minimum Peak 1819 Marker Delta 1819 3.12.7.4 Pk Search Config 1819 Peak Search Range 1819 Peak Search Range Start 1820 Peak Search Range Stop 1820...
Page 51 Table Of Contents Invert Spectrum 1848 Power Reference Plane 1848 Optimize EVM 1849 Mixing Mode State (Remote Command Only) 1849 IF Frequency (Remote Command Only) 1850 3.12.8.4 Global 1850 Global Center Freq 1850 Global EMC Std 1851 Restore Defaults 1852 3.12.8.5 Sample Period (Aperture) Setting (Remote Query Only) 1852 3.12.9 Sweep...
Page 52 Table Of Contents 4.2.1.2 GPIB Controller 1868 4.2.2 SCPI LAN 1869 4.2.2.1 SCPI Telnet 1870 4.2.2.2 SCPI Socket 1870 4.2.2.3 SICL Server 1871 4.2.2.4 HiSLIP Server 1872 4.2.2.5 Verbose SCPI On/Off 1872 4.2.2.6 Device Clear on Disconnect 1873 4.2.2.7 SCPI Socket Control Port (Remote Query Only) 1874 4.2.2.8 SCPI Instrument Port (Remote Query Only) 1874...
Page 53 Table Of Contents 4.2.11.2 Config IPV4 Address (Remote Command Only) 1887 4.2.11.3 Config IPV6 Address (Remote Command Only) 1887 4.2.11.4 List All Physical Network Adapter IP Addresses (Remote Query Only) 1887 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes 1889 4.3.1 Power-On Mode 1889 4.3.2 Table of Modes 1890...
Page 54 Table Of Contents 4.4.3 FPGA Configuration 1904 4.4.3.1 FPGA Load Preference 1907 4.4.3.2 Load FPGA 1908 4.4.4 Restore Power On Defaults 1909 4.4.5 Configure Applications – Desktop application 1909 4.4.6 Configure Applications - Instrument boot-up 1912 4.4.7 Configure Applications - Remote Commands 1912 4.4.7.1 Configuration list (Remote Command Only) 1913...
Page 55 Table Of Contents 4.6.2.8 Align Now External Mixer 1935 4.6.2.9 Align Source 1936 4.6.2.10 Align Receiver 1937 4.6.2.11 Align Fast 1937 4.6.2.12 Align LO Leakage 1938 4.6.2.13 Align IF Cable 1938 4.6.2.14 Align RRH Amplitude 1938 4.6.2.15 Align Fast RRH Amplitude 1939 4.6.2.16 Align RRH LO Power 1939...
Page 56 Table Of Contents Perform Backup (without Flash) (Remote Command Only) 1980 Perform Restore (without Flash) (Remote Command Only) 1980 Alignment Data Wizard (with Flash) 1981 Perform Backup (with Flash) (Remote Command Only) 1986 Perform Restore (With Flash) (Remote Command Only) 1986 Restore Alignment Defaults 1986...
Page 57 Table Of Contents 4.7.9 Remove License (Remote Command Only) 2003 4.7.10 List Licenses (Remote Query Only) 2004 4.7.11 Validate License (Remote Query Only) 2005 4.7.12 Host ID Query (Remote Query Only) 2005 4.8 Security 2006 4.8.1 USB Write Protect 2006 4.8.2 Restore Security Defaults 2006 4.9 Diagnostics...
Page 58 Table Of Contents 4.12.8 SCPI Version Query (Remote Query Only) 2018 4.12.9 Date (Remote Command Only) 2018 4.12.10 Time (Remote Command Only) 2018 4.12.11 Input Overload Enable (Remote Command Only) 2019 4.12.12 Power Up (Remote Query Only) 2019 5 Preset 2020 5.1 Preset Dropdown 2023...
Page 59 Table Of Contents 6.1.6.3 Power Ref 2051 6.1.6.4 Power Unit 2051 6.1.6.5 Amptd Offset 2052 6.1.6.6 Amplitude Increment 2053 6.1.7 Frequency 2053 6.1.8 List Sequencer 2053 6.1.8.1 Sequencer 2054 6.1.8.2 Initiate Sequence 2054 6.1.8.3 Repetition 2055 6.1.8.4 Trig Out Type 2055 6.1.8.5 Select Data Marker 2055...
Page 60 Table Of Contents Clear List (Remote Command Only) 2077 6.1.8.8 Remote Software Trigger (Remote command Only) 2078 6.1.8.9 Query List Sequence Initiation Armed Status (Remote Query Only) 2078 6.1.9 Frequency Setup 2078 6.1.9.1 Frequency 2078 6.1.9.2 Channel 2081 6.1.9.3 Radio Setup 2085 Radio Standard/Radio Band 2086...
Page 61 Table Of Contents Baseband Freq Offs 2105 Baseband Power 2106 Mkr 1-4 Polarity 2106 Pulse/RF Blank 2106 ALC Hold 2107 Trigger Type 2108 Continuous trigger 2108 Single trigger 2109 Segment Advance trigger 2110 Trigger Source 2110 Bus Trigger Command (Remote Command Only) 2111 Sync to Trigger Source 2111...
Page 62 Table Of Contents Edit Selected Sequence 2130 Segment 2130 Waveform 2130 Repetitions 2130 Marker 1 – Marker 4 2130 Sync Seq File 2131 Insert Waveform 2131 Segments in ARB Memory 2132 Delete Segment From ARB Mem 2132 Delete All From ARB Memory 2132 Delete Segment 2132...
Page 63 Table Of Contents 6.1.13.6 Sync Connected (Remote Query Only) 2147 6.1.14 Source Preset 2147 6.2 Input 2148 6.2.1 Select Input 2148 6.2.2 RF Input Port 2157 6.2.3 SA Frequency Extender Firmware Update (Front Panel Only) 2167 6.2.4 SA Frequency Extender Cable Correction 2168 6.2.5 Half Duplex Input Port 2168...
Page 64 Table Of Contents Differential 2195 Input Z 2196 Skew 2197 Combined Differential/Input Z (Remote Command Only) 2198 6.2.21.2 I Probe 2198 Attenuation 2199 Offset 2200 Coupling 2200 Clear Calibration 2201 6.2.21.3 Calibrate 2201 I/Q Isolation Calibration 2202 I/Q Isolation Calibration Time (Remote Query Only) 2203 I Port 2203...
Page 65 Table Of Contents 6.2.27 Audio In Impedance 2215 6.2.28 Input/Output Preset 2215 6.3 External Gain 2217 6.3.1 External Preamp 2217 6.3.2 External Gain - MS 2219 6.3.3 External Gain - BTS 2220 6.3.4 I Ext Gain 2221 6.3.5 Q Ext Gain 2222 6.3.6 Q Gain in I+jQ 2222...
Page 66 Table Of Contents 6.5.7 Complex Corrections 2248 6.5.7.1 Go To Row (Select Correction) 2249 6.5.7.2 Delete Row 2249 6.5.7.3 Delete All 2249 6.5.7.4 Correction On 2250 6.5.7.5 Correction Port 2250 6.5.7.6 Direction 2251 6.5.7.7 Description 2252 6.5.7.8 Comment 2252 6.5.7.9 File 2253 6.5.7.10 Freq Interpolation (Remote Command Only) 2253...
Page 67 Table Of Contents 6.6 Freq Ref Input 2265 6.6.1 Freq Ref Input 2265 6.6.2 Ext Ref Freq 2270 6.6.3 Default External Ref Freq 2271 6.6.4 LO Ref Input 2271 6.6.5 Ref Lock BW 2272 6.6.6 Reference Oscillator On/Off (Remote Command Only) 2273 6.6.6.1 Select Ref 2273...
Page 68 Table Of Contents 6.8.9 Select Analyzer PXI Line 2297 6.8.10 Source Internal Trig Out 2297 6.8.11 Source Internal Trig Out Polarity 2298 6.9 Calibration 2300 6.9.1 Configuration 2300 6.9.1.1 Cal Group 2302 6.9.1.2 Calibrate Checked Rows 2302 6.9.1.3 Apply Cal Group 2303 6.9.1.4 Abort Calibration 2303...
Page 69 Table Of Contents 6.9.1.27 Start Freq 2313 6.9.1.28 Stop Freq 2314 6.9.1.29 Freq Step 2315 6.9.1.30 Freq Points 2315 6.9.1.31 Mech Atten Type 2316 6.9.1.32 Mech Atten Start 2316 6.9.1.33 Mech Atten Stop 2317 6.9.1.34 Mech Atten Step 2318 6.9.1.35 Elec Atten Type 2318 6.9.1.36 Elec Atten Start 2318...
Page 70 Table Of Contents 6.10 Calibrator Control 2337 6.10.1 Select Cal Source 2337 6.10.2 Cal Output 2337 6.10.3 Cal Frequency 2338 6.10.4 Cal Signal Type 2338 6.10.5 Cal Comb Spacing 2338 6.10.6 Calibrator Reference 2339 6.11 Advanced 2340 6.11.1 T/R Port High Power Attenuator 2340 6.12 Aux I/O Control 2342...
Page 71 Table Of Contents 7.2.19 Select Complex Correction 2359 7.2.20 Recall VDI CCD Correction 2359 7.2.21 SCPI Recorder 2359 7.2.22 Recall From File 2360 7.2.23 Mask 2360 7.2.24 Sequence 2360 7.2.25 Waveform 2360 7.2.26 Load Segment to ARB Memory 2363 7.2.27 Delete Segment From ARB Mem 2364 7.2.28 Delete All From ARB Memory 2364...
Page 72 Table Of Contents 7.3 Save 2381 7.3.1 Save to File / Save As 2382 7.3.2 State 2384 7.3.3 Register 1 thru Register 16 2385 7.3.4 Edit Register Names 2385 7.3.5 Trace+State 2386 7.3.6 Save From Trace 2388 7.3.7 Register 1 thru Register 16 2389 7.3.8 Edit Register Names 2389...
Page 73 Table Of Contents 7.3.33 Scan Table On/Off 2415 7.3.34 Signal List On/Off 2415 7.3.35 Output Format 2415 7.3.36 Disturbance Analyzer 2415 7.3.37 Title 2415 7.3.38 Client 2415 7.3.39 Operator 2415 7.3.40 Product Description 2416 7.3.41 Comment 2416 7.3.42 Meas Setup On/Off 2416 7.3.43 Disturbance List On/Off 2416...
Page 74 Table Of Contents 7.3.66 Mass Storage Change Directory (Remote Command Only) 2433 7.3.67 Mass Storage Copy (Remote Command Only) 2434 7.3.68 Mass Storage Device Copy (Remote Command Only) 2434 7.3.69 Mass Storage Delete (Remote Command Only) 2434 7.3.70 Mass Storage Data (Remote Command Only) 2435 7.3.71 Mass Storage Make Directory (Remote Command Only) 2435...
Page 75 Table Of Contents 8.1.1.13 Input Q 2465 8.1.1.14 I (Demodulated) 2465 8.1.1.15 Q (Demodulated) 2466 8.1.1.16 Aux I/Q Mag 2466 8.1.1.17 PXI 2467 8.1.1.18 Internal 2467 8.1.1.19 Prot Channel Detection 2468 8.1.1.20 Prot Frame Aligned 2468 8.1.1.21 Prot Event 2469 8.1.2 Trigger Level 2469 8.1.3 Trigger Delay...
Page 76 Table Of Contents 8.3 Gate Settings 2493 8.3.1 Gate On/Off 2493 8.3.2 Gate View On/Off 2494 8.3.3 Gate Delay 2496 8.3.4 Gate Length 2497 8.3.5 Gate Method 2498 8.3.6 Control Edge/Level 2499 8.3.7 Gate Holdoff 2500 8.3.8 Gate View Sweep Time 2501 8.3.9 Gate View Start Time 2502...
Page 77 Table Of Contents 2516 2516 2525 2528 2528 2529 2529 2530 2530 2532 2532 2533 2533 2534 2556 2557 2558 9.2 IEEE 488.2 Common Commands 2559 9.2.1 *CAL? - Calibration Query 2559 9.2.2 *CLS - Clear Status 2560 9.2.3 *ESE - Standard Event Status Enable 2560 9.2.4 *ESR? - Standard Event Status Register Query 2561...
Page 78 Table Of Contents 9.3 SCPI Operation and Results Query 2567 9.3.1 Mode Control 2567 9.3.2 Measurement Control 2567 9.3.2.1 CONFigure 2568 9.3.2.2 INITiate 2569 9.3.2.3 FETCh 2569 9.3.2.4 READ 2570 9.3.2.5 MEASure 2571 9.3.3 Trace Formatting Commands 2572 9.3.3.1 Clear Trace (Remote Command Only) 2572 9.3.3.2 Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only) 2573...
Page 79 Table Of Contents 9.4.6.3 Operation Register 2602 Operation Condition Query 2603 Operation Enable 2604 Operation Event Query 2604 Operation Negative Transition 2605 Operation Positive Transition 2605 9.4.6.4 Operation Instrument Register 2606 Operation Instrument Condition 2606 Operation Instrument Enable 2607 Operation Instrument Event Query 2607 Operation Instrument Negative Transition 2608...
Page 80 Table Of Contents Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event Query 2627 Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Negative Transition 2627 Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Positive Transition 2627 9.4.6.11 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Register 2628 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition 2629 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Enable 2629 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event Query 2630...
Page 81 Table Of Contents 10.2.2 Center Frequency 2650 10.2.3 DC Coupled 2650 10.2.4 Detector Type 2651 10.2.5 Do Noise Correction 2651 10.2.6 Do Spur Suppression 2651 10.2.7 Electronic Attenuator Bypass 2652 10.2.8 Electronic Attenuation 2652 10.2.9 External Reference Frequency 2652 10.2.10 Frequency Reference Source 2653 10.2.11 IF Gain 2653...
Page 82 Table Of Contents 10.6 Fetch Fast Power Measurement (Remote Command Only) 2663 10.7 Execute Fast Power Measurement (Remote Command Only) 2664 10.8 Binary Read Fast Power Measurement (Remote Command Only) 2665 10.9 Diagnostic Binary Read Fast Power Measurement (Remote Command Only) 2666 WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 83 X-Series Signal Analyzers WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 1 Documentation Roadmap This section describes the Keysight products covered by this document, and provides links to related documentation. – "Products Covered by this Document" on page 84 – "Additional Documentation" on page 85...
Page 84 1 Documentation Roadmap 1.1 Products Covered by this Document 1.1 Products Covered by this Document For the full list of instrument models covered by this documentation, see the title page: "WLAN ModeUser's & Programmer's Reference" on page WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 85 – Users & Programmers Reference, in downloadable PDF format For information on this Mode, download from: http://literature.cdn.keysight.com/litweb/pdf/N9077-90006.pdf The following documents are available online at keysight.com: X-Series Messages Guide The following documents are in downloadable PDF format: Getting Started Guides & Security –...
Page 86 1 Documentation Roadmap 1.2 Additional Documentation – N9041B UXA Specifications Guide Measurement Guides – Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measurement Guide – Real-Time Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Guide – Noise Figure Measurement Guide – Analog Demod Measurement Application Measurement Guide – Phase Noise Measurement Application Measurement Guide –...
Page 87 X-Series Signal Analyzers WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 2 User Interface Here are the basic elements of the Multitouch User Interface. For more information, tap a topic. Included in this section are also topics for several front panel keys not described in other topics.
Page 88 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1 Screen Tabs In the X-Series Multitouch User Interface (or Multitouch UI), you can run many different Measurement Applications, or “Modes”. Examples are Spectrum Analyzer Mode, LTE-A FDD Mode, IQ Analyzer Mode, and Real Time Spectrum Analyzer Mode.
Page 89 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs The following topics provide more information: – "Mode/Meas/View Dialog" on page 89 – "Add Screen" on page 106 – "Multiscreen" on page 177 2.1.1 Mode/Meas/View Dialog The Mode/Meas/View dialog opens when you press the selected (blue) Screen tab (see "Screen Tabs"...
Page 90 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1.1.1 Mode The first column in the Mode/Meas/View dialog allows you to select the desired Mode from those currently licensed in your instrument. Modes, also known as “measurement applications”, are collections of measurement capabilities packaged together to provide you with an instrument personality specific to your measurement needs.
Page 91 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs :INSTrument:SELect CONFigure commands separately. See "Mode and Measurement Select" on page :INSTrument[:SELect] <mode_id> Remote Command where <mode_id> is one of the values listed in "Index to Modes" on page 92 below :INSTrument[:SELect]? :INST SA Example :INST:CAT? Notes...
Page 92 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs :CONF commands Index to Modes The Mode Number in the table below is the parameter for use with the :INSTrument:NSELect command. The Mode Parameter is the parameter for use with the :INSTrument[:SELect] command. Your actual choices will depend upon which applications are installed in your instrument.
Page 93 Each application (Mode) that runs in an X-Series instrument consumes virtual memory. The various applications consume varying amounts of virtual memory, and as more applications run, the memory consumption increases. Keysight characterizes each Mode and assigns a memory usage quantity based on a conservative estimate.
Page 94 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs :INST:CAT? Example Notes Query returns a quoted string of the installed and licensed modes separated with a comma. Example: "SA,PNOISE,WCDMA" :INSTrument:CATalog? INSTrument:SELECT Backwards VSA (E4406A): returned a list of installed items Compatibility as a comma separated list of string values, for example: Notes "BASIC","GSM","EDGEGSM","CDMA","SERVICE"...
Page 95 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs Current Application Options (Remote Command Only) Returns a string that is the Options list of the currently selected application (Mode). This information is also displayed in the Show System screen :SYSTem:APPLication[:CURRent]:OPTion? Remote Command :SYST:APPL:OPT? Example Notes Query returns a quoted string that is the Option list of the currently selected application (Mode).
Page 96 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs Application Catalog Revision (Remote Command Only) Returns the Revision of the provided Model Number. :SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog:REVision? <model> Remote Command :SYST:APPL:CAT:REV? ‘N9060A’ Example Notes Returned value is a quoted string of revision for the provided Model Number. The revision will be a null- string ("") if the provided Model Number is not installed, licensed, and loaded.
Page 97 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs GSM Mode compatibility command (Remote Command only) Provided for backwards compatibility. When this command is received, the analyzer aliases it to the following: :INST:SEL EDGEGSM :INSTrument[:SELect] GSM Remote Command :INST GSM Example SA compatibility command for EMC (Remote Command only) Provided for ESU compatibility.
Page 98 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs This results in the analyzer being placed in the EMI Receiver Mode, running the APD measurement, in order to emulate the ESU APD Mode. :INSTrument[:SELect] APDistribution Remote Command :INST APD Example IF Mode compatibility command for EMC (Remote Command only) Provided for ESU compatibility.
Page 99 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 100 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1.1.5 Sequencer Allows multiple Screens to update sequentially while in "Multiscreen" on page 177 display mode. Each Screen updates in sequence, and when all have updated, the sequence will start again. To start the Sequencer, you must have more than one Screen defined, and you must have Multiscreen selected (see "Screen Tabs"...
Page 101 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs In the Sequencer block in the upper left hand corner, tap the Sequencing switch to turn it On: WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 102 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs The instrument will immediately exit the Mode/Meas/View Dialog and begin making measurements in each of the screens, one after the other. When a measurement is being made in a particular Screen, that Screen’s tab will be blue. Measurement being made in Screen 1: Measurement being made in Screen 2: WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 103 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs Touching any key or control on the display will cause the Sequencer to stop, so that you can make desired changes. When this happens, the message “Sequencer stopped” is displayed. When the Sequencer is running, the screens update in the order in which they were created.
Page 104 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs To reset the name, delete the screen name entirely. Each Screen Name must be unique; you cannot give the same name to more than one screen. :INSTrument:SCReen:REName <alphanumeric> Remote Command :INST:SCR:REN “Baseband” Example Notes The currently active screen is renamed.
Page 105 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs “This function will delete all defined screens and their settings, except for the current screen. This action cannot be undone. Do you want to proceed?” Pressing OK or Enter deletes the screen, pressing Cancel or ESC does not. :INSTrument:SCReen:DELete:ALL Remote Command...
Page 106 2.1 Screen Tabs functions – Easy-to-use Microsoft Windows graphical user interface For more information see the Keysight 89600 Series VSA web site at www.keysight.com/find/89600vsa To learn more about how to use the 89600 VSA in the instrument, start the 89600 VSA software, then open the 89600 VSA Help and navigate to the topic "About...
Page 107 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs If the display is disabled (via :DISP:ENAB OFF) then the error message “-221, Settings conflict; Screen SCPI cannot be used when Display is disabled” appears WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 108 2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar 2.2 Meas Bar The Meas Bar is used to display annotation for the current measurement. There are three primary uses for the Meas Bar: 1. To show annotation for the most important parameters in the measurement so you can see them at a glance 2.
Page 109 2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar Settings that are colored amber are those that you need to be particularly aware of; for example, if Alignments are off, this is shown in amber, so you will know that you may not be meeting spec. Similarly, if DC coupling is on, this is shown amber, to alert you to be careful what voltage you put on the input.
Page 110 2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar LXI indicator This indicator displays in green when LAN is connected, in white when LAN is not connected, and in red when LAN is connected but has a connection problem. PASS/FAIL indicator This annunciator displays when Limits are turned on. It is green if all Limits are passing, and a red FAIL if any limit is not passing.
Page 111 2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar In the example above, trace 1 is active, visible, and in Average using the Sample detector, the other traces are inactive, blanked and in Clear/Write using the Normal detector. Tapping this panel drops down controls for the Traces. WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 112 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display 2.3 Measurement Display The Measurement Display contains one or more data windows displaying the result of the current measurement. These may be graphical or textual windows. Each window in the Measurement display contains a "Window Title"...
Page 113 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Measurements that support User Views (see "View Editor" on page 156) also display the Window Number in the Window Title, to enable window addressing from SCPI. The number is the number that will be used in the SCPI command to address that window, for example, in the WCDMA Mod Accuracy measurement, Code Domain Power is assigned window number 6, so you address it with the following SCPI command:...
Page 114 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Note also that the Window Data dropdown can be a cascaded list, if the number of available results requires categorization to hold them all: WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 115 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Note also that the Window Data dropdown sometimes includes controls for further configuring the window, for example, in LTE choosing the desired Component Carrier and Data format. WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 116 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Touching a window’s title dropdown also selects the window. 2.3.2 Measurement Data The Measurement Data region shows graphical or textual data for the Data selected in the Window Title Data control. Below you can see examples of both graphical and textual windows in a four-window display.
Page 117 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Swipe There are several swipe actions, as listed below. One of the most important actions is swiping a spectrum window to the left or right, or up or down, to adjust the frequency and level of the spectrum, as shown below. Swipe actions are summarized in the table below.
Page 118 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Object Action Toggle control Toggle in that direction Pinch You can also pinch in or out either horizontally or vertically to zoom in the x-axis or y-axis dimension. For example, a pinch horizontally lets you adjust the Span of the Spectrum window.
Page 119 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Right Click on Lets you select Help the Background Right Click on a Lets you add or remove that control from the User Menu or get Help on that Menu Panel control control Tapping an object causes the actions defined in the table below: Object Action Marker...
Page 120 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Touching anywhere off the hotspot panel or pressing any hardkey except Save or Quick Save closes the hotspot panel. Annotation which is not currently able to be adjusted is not grayed out on the display, but the control in the hotspot that drops down or pops up is grayed out.
Page 121 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel 2.4 Menu Panel The menu panel is the main focus of the X-Series Multitouch user interface. The controls include active functions, dropdowns, action buttons, radio buttons and toggles. WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 122 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 123 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel The menu panel normally appears on the right side of the display and consists of a rectangular panel with multiple “sub-panels” lying on top of each other, each sub- panel being accessed by a tab on the right. You press a front panel key (or “hardkey”) to access a particular menu.
Page 124 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 125 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel If you move to a different menu panel or sub-panel and then come back to a previous panel, the previous panel is always reset to be scrolled all the way back to the top. Accessing Menus Without Using Front-Panel Keys You can access the menu panels without using the front panel keys, as you would need to do if you were operating the instrument using Remote Desktop.
Page 126 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel for example 13.255 GHz, as in the example below: An active function is “active” if the numeric value is surrounded by a black background with a blue border, as below. In this state, it is ready to receive numeric input from the number pad on the front panel, the knob, or the step keys.
Page 127 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel This causes the Numeric Entry Panel to pop up to receive the numbers you are typing: Type in as many digits as required, then touch one of the unit terminator buttons in the Numeric Entry Panel to complete the entry. In this case, 2 GHz was the desired entry, so you just touch the “GHz”...
Page 128 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel The Numeric Entry Panel disappears and, in the example, the active function value becomes 2 GHz. WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 129 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel It is important to note that you can always pop up the Numeric Entry Panel by touching an active function control while it is active; for example, if you were to touch it in the figure above, the Numeric Entry Panel would pop up right next to the control: WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 130 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 131 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel You can display the Numeric Entry Panel by touching any active function control while it is active, but you don’t have to pop up the Numeric Entry Panel first, you can just start typing and it will pop up on its own, thus saving you a keystroke. You can also adjust a value without displaying the Numeric Entry panel by turning the knob or using the step keys while an active function is active.
Page 132 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel 2.4.1.4 Add to SCPI Recorder Adds SCPI to the recorder from User Interface features that have equivalent SCPI. This is the manual mode for adding SCPI to the recorder when you do not wish to add SCPI continuously.
Page 133 2 User Interface 2.5 Cancel key 2.5 Cancel key This front-panel key has the same functions as the Windows Esc (Escape) key. It does the following: – Cancels dialogs – Cancels active functions (unless there is an entry in progress, in which case it cancels that, and reverts to the previous value) –...
Page 134 2 User Interface 2.6 Onscreen Keyboard key 2.6 Onscreen Keyboard key This key turns the onscreen alpha keyboard (OSK) on and off. There are two onscreen keyboards: – The Multitouch OSK, which pops up automatically if, while using the analyzer application, a text field becomes the active function –...
Page 135 2 User Interface 2.7 Touch On/Off Key 2.7 Touch On/Off Key This front-panel key turns the display touch functionality on and off. If off, you can turn it back on using the front panel Touch On/Off key. When the touch functionality is off, you can still use a mouse as a pointer.
Page 136 2 User Interface 2.8 Tab key 2.8 Tab key This key has the same function as the Tab key on a PC keyboard. You can use this key to display the Windows Taskbar, as follows. – Alt-Tab to the Desktop –...
Page 137 2 User Interface 2.9 Local Button 2.9 Local Button Appears in the Menu Panel when the instrument is in remote, and can be brought back to local via the Local (ESC) Key. See also "Cancel key" on page 133. WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 138 2 User Interface 2.10 Control Bar 2.10 Control Bar The Control Bar contains controls and readouts that let you control instrument functions independent of the current measurement. WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 139 2 User Interface 2.11 Windows 2.11 Windows Pressing the Windows icon on the "Control Bar" on page 138 has the same effect as pressing the Windows icon on the Windows taskbar. It displays the Windows taskbar and Start Menu, which allows you to launch Windows programs and access features such as the Control Panel.
Page 140 2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo 2.12 Undo/Redo The Undo button in the "Control Bar" on page 138, and the Undo front panel key, are used to undo the most recently executed function. If you Undo a function, and then decide you should not have done so, you can use the Redo button in the "Control Bar"...
Page 141 2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo UNDO stack REDO stack Det = Peak RBW = 1MHz CF = 1 GHz When you press Undo, the top item on the Undo stack is removed, the action represented by that item is undone, and the item is placed on the Redo stack. So pressing Undo once in the above case would undo the setting of the peak detector, and the stacks would look like this: UNDO stack...
Page 142 2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo For example, in the example above, if you now were to change another setting, such as VBW = 1 kHz, the Redo stack gets cleared, and the stacks would look like this: UNDO stack REDO stack VBW = 1 kHz RBW = 1MHz CF = 1 GHz...
Page 143 2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo When you press the Redo icon or Ctl and the Undo hardkey, you are notified with an advisory popup message; for example, if the Center Frequency had been 300 MHz, and you changed it to 1 GHz and then pressed Undo, the message would say: UNDO: Center Freq 1 GHz ->...
Page 144 2 User Interface 2.13 File Functions 2.13 File Functions The File Functions popup contains controls for executing Save, Recall, File and Print operations. You display the File Functions popup by tapping the File Functions icon in the "Control Bar" on page 138.
Page 145 2 User Interface 2.14 Help 2.14 Help Pressing the Help button in the "Control Bar" on page 138, the Help front panel key, or the F1 key if you have a PC keyboard connected, opens the context-sensitive help system. The Help button appears in the "Control Bar"...
Page 146 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar 2.15 Status Bar The Status Panel (or Status Bar) appears at the bottom of the display and contains three fields: The Message Balloon appears on the left side of the Status Panel and lets you know when there is an unread message in the queue.
Page 147 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar The triangle is unfilled if no there are no open conditions, filled with yellow if all open conditions are warnings, and filled with red if at least one open condition is an error. The number displayed is the total number of open conditions. Touching the Condition Indicator opens up the Show Status dialog (see below) with the Current Conditions tab selected.
Page 148 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar If the display fills up, scrolling is enabled just as in other X-Series Multi-touch UI displays. The Status dialog automatically refreshes as new messages and conditions occur. At the bottom of the screen is a Clear Message Queue button. This button clears all errors in all error queues.
Page 149 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar <Error Number>,<Error> Where <Error Number> <Error> are those shown on the Show Errors screen Backwards In some legacy analyzers, the Repeat field shows the number of times the message has repeated since Compatibility the last time the error queue was cleared. In the X-Series, the Repeat field shows the number of times Notes the error has repeated since the last intervening error.
Page 150 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar The fields on the History display are: Type Displays the icon identifying the event or condition as an error or warning Displays the error number Message Displays the message text Repeat (RPT) This field shows the number of consecutive instances of the event, uninterrupted by other events.
Page 151 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar peak found” – A condition is an occurrence of finite duration, that is, it has a start and an end. Conditions are states of the analyzer characterized by some combination of settings or some kind of failure that the user needs to be told about while it is happening, but then can stop being told once it goes away;...
Page 152 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar The fields on the Current Conditions display are: Type Displays the icon identifying the event or condition as an error or warning or informational Displays the error number Message Displays the message text Time Shows the most recent time (including the date) at which the event occurred.
Page 153 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 154 2 User Interface 2.16 Block Diagram 2.16 Block Diagram When you press the Block Diagram button in the "Control Bar" on page 138, the display changes to a stylized pictorial representation of the current internal hardware setup and signal processing path. When you touch one of the blocks on the Block Diagram, the corresponding menu panel opens.
Page 155 2 User Interface 2.16 Block Diagram And here is the Block Diagram when the I/Q inputs are selected: WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 156 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor 2.17 View Editor This section describes the use of the View Editor, which allows you to: – Add windows to and delete windows from the current measurement – Resize and rearrange windows – Create User Views User Views are custom Views that you create by adding, deleting, rearranging, resizing, or changing the contents of the windows in an existing View, and then saving the edited View as a new View.
Page 157 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 158 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 159 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor You can save an edited View using the Save Layout as New View control in the View menu (see "To Save a User View" on page 169). On occasion, the instrument may automatically save an edited View for you. If you have edited a View, so that the * is displaying next to the View name, you must save that View as a User View before you save State or switch measurements.
Page 160 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor To Close the View Editor Tap the View Editor button again. The user chooses the desired View through the use of the Mode/Meas/View dialog (see "Mode/Meas/View Dialog" on page 89) or the View menu (a tab under the Display key).
Page 161 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor When you do this, you get the View Editor screen, which appears as below. The menu panel switches to the View menu. Here we see that we are in the Predefined View called “Basic”. Each window has two arrows containing + signs.
Page 162 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor A fifth window has been added, and is automatically assigned the number 5. (The window number, which is displayed in the Window Title region, is used when sending SCPI commands to that window). Note the * that now appears next to Basic in the View menu, indicating that you are now in the modified Basic View.
Page 163 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor A panel drops down, containing a Data control for specifying window results. Some measurements, such as LTE-A in this example, also provide controls on this dropdown for specifying other window parameters, such as the Component Carrier and Data Format, Tap the Data control and you will see a list of available results for the window.
Page 164 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Choose the result you want and tap OK. Here we have chosen IQ Meas Time from the Demod group: Your new, edited User View is now ready to use. WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 165 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor 2.17.2 To Resize or Rearrange Windows in a View Sometimes you may wish to resize a window. To do this go back into the View Editor and note the large, translucent white circles along the edges of the draggable borders.
Page 166 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor The outline of the window appears as it is being dragged. When you start to drag a window, target symbols appear in the other windows: If you drop a window on one of the targets, it swaps positions with the target window.
Page 167 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor When you hover over one of the stripes it gets dimmer, to show the position the window being dragged will take on. If you release a window over an inner stripe, the window you are dragging and the window over which you were hovering resize to share the space the target window originally occupied.
Page 168 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor In either case, one or more of the remaining windows resize to occupy the space formerly occupied by the window you were dragging. 2.17.3 To Delete a Window from a View The View Editor also lets you delete a window. To do this, tap one of the circled red X’s, as shown below.
Page 169 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor When you are finished with it, you can restore the Layout to the default for Basic by pressing “Restore Layout to Default”. Or you can save your edited View as a “User View” (if you exit the measurement without saving the edited View, the instrument will save it for you as a User View called “Autosaved”).
Page 170 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor When you tap “Done”, the View is saved: Notice the User View region which has appeared on the menu panel above, with the new User View called “My New View. Notice also that “Basic” has returned to its original, unedited state and the * is gone from its name.
Page 171 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Layout to Default” is grayed out. Note also that if you go to the Mode/Meas dialog, you will see the User View there as well: When naming a new View, you must choose a name that is not already in use for any User View in any measurement;...
Page 172 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor The following is a full list of all MeasName parameters. Measurement Name SCPI ID ACPower ACP, Adjacent Channel Power AM Depth Amplitude Probability Distribution AUDDist Audio Distortion AUDFreq Audio Frequency AUDLevel Audio Level AUDSinad Audio SINAD Automatic Direction Finder CHPower...
Page 173 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Measurement Name SCPI ID LSEQuencer List Sequencer LIST List Sweep LPLot Log Plot LORA LoRa (CSS) Demodulation Marker Beacon Mod Accuracy Modulation Analysis MODDist Modulation Distortion MODRate Modulation Rate MODSinad Modulation SINAD MONitor Monitor Spectrum NFIGure Noise Figure OBWidth...
Page 174 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Measurement Name SCPI ID Transmit Analysis PVTime Transmit On/Off Power TXPower Transmit Power (Burst Power) TRFLevel Tuned RF Level TTRF Tuned RF Level with Tracking ETSPur Tx Band Spur VHF Omni-Directional Range Examples: – The User View file for the Swept SA measurement is SA.SANalyzer.layout –...
Page 175 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor 3. Select the View tab 4. Tap Delete User View 2.17.7 To Delete All User Views You can delete all User Views by tapping “Delete All User Views.” The default view becomes the current view for the Measurement if a User View was the current view when this control was pressed.
Page 176 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor selected in the View menu. These switches are grayed out if you are in a modified View or a User View. Since only one of these switches can be on at a time, and because these switches turn off on a Preset, User Views offer a superior way of adding windows than using the switches.
Page 177 2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen 2.18 Multiscreen You can configure up to 16 different Screens at a time. Normally, you only see one Screen, and the set of configured screens is shown across the top of the display in a series of "Screen Tabs"...
Page 178 2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen While in Multiscreen View, the button changes from a black background to a blue background: To exit Multiscreen view, tap the button again. Multiscreen View cannot be activated if only one screen is configured. Each Screen contains one Mode, each Mode contains one Measurement, and each Measurement contains a number of Windows arranged in Views.
Page 179 2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen – Each Screen has a tab that contains the name of the Mode and Measurement in the box and a number associated with the instance of that Mode. You can enter a custom Screen name that replaces the Mode name, by going into the Mode/Meas dialog –...
Page 180 2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen Preset Returns the name of the active screen 2.18.2 Screen List (Remote only command) You can obtain a list of currently configured Screens. This permits your remote program to manage screens for selection, renaming, or deletion. :INSTrument:SCReen:CATalog? Remote Command...
Page 181 2 User Interface 2.19 Fullscreen 2.19 Fullscreen The Fullscreen button is in the "Control Bar" on page 138, at the lower right corner of the display. When Full Screen is pressed the measurement window expands horizontally over the entire instrument display. The screen graticule area expands to fill the available display area.
Page 182 X-Series Signal Analyzers WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 3 WLAN Mode WLAN Mode can be used to quickly ensure a product development conforms to regulatory requirements, as well as providing RF diagnostic and troubleshooting capability for a WLAN device. The standards versions supported by WLAN Mode are: –...
Page 183 3 WLAN Mode – CCDF – Modulation Analysis – Spectral Flatness – IQ Waveform The following measurements are not available for use with Baseband I/Q Inputs. – Spectrum Emission Mask – Spurious Emissions – Monitor Spectrum – Channel Power – Occupied BW –...
Page 184 3 WLAN Mode 3.1 Measurement Commands 3.1 Measurement Commands Commands to select each measurement are shown below. Commands relating to the views and windows for each measurement are described in the documentation for each measurement. Example Measurement Selected Command :CONFigure:CHPower Channel Power :CONFigure:SEMask Spectrum Emissions Mask...
Page 185 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement 3.2 Channel Power Measurement This measurement is used to find the total power present in a specified bandwidth. Power Spectral Density (signal power normalized to 1 Hz) is also reported. When in WLAN Mode, or when WLAN radio standard is selected in SA Mode, the peak Power Spectral Density for 1 MHz is reported.
Page 186 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Backwards Compatibility Queries Query Return Value :FETCh:CHPower:CHPower? Returns the Channel Power (dBm) :MEASure:CHPower:CHPower? :READ:CHPower:CHPower? :FETCh:CHPower:DENSity? Returns the Power Spectral Density (dBm/Hz) :MEASure:CHPower:DENSity? :READ:CHPower:DENSity? The results returned by the queries depend on the currently-selected Mode and the value of (where required).
Page 187 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Results Returned Channel Power A floating-point number representing the total channel power in the specified integration bandwidth PSD (Power The power in the specified unit bandwidth. The unit bandwidth is Spectral selected by "PSD Unit"...
Page 188 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD Mode Measurement Results Results Returned 1 or not Returns scalar results: specified Channel Power A floating-point number representing the total channel power in the specified integration bandwidth PSD (Power The power in the specified unit bandwidth. The unit bandwidth is Spectral selected by "PSD Unit"...
Page 189 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement 5G NR Mode Measurement Results Results Returned 1 or not Returns scalar results: specified Channel Power A floating-point number representing the total channel power in the specified integration bandwidth PSD (Power The power in the specified unit bandwidth. The unit bandwidth is Spectral selected by "PSD Unit"...
Page 190 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement WLAN Channel Power Measurement Results Results Returned 1 or not Returns scalar results: specified When the radio standard is not 802.11ac 80 + 80 MHz or 802.11ax 80 + 80 MHz: Channel Power A floating-point number representing the total channel power in the specified integration bandwidth Peak PSD (Power Spectral Density) The peak PSD over the integration bandwidth.
Page 191 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Results Returned Returns floating point numbers that are the captured trace data of the power (in dBm/resolution BW) of the signal for Trace 2. The frequency span of the captured trace data is specified by Span Returns floating point numbers that are the captured trace data of the power (in dBm/resolution BW) of the signal for Trace 3.
Page 192 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement 3.2.1.2 Carrier Info Windows: "Graph" on page 192, "Metrics" on page 193 Dual window view: Channel Power graph and Carrier Info table. :DISP:CHP:VIEW CINF Example Dependencies Only available in MSR, LTE-A FDD/TDD and 5G NR Modes 3.2.2 Windows This section describes the windows that are available in the Channel Power measurement:...
Page 193 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Spectrum View with Bar Graph On This is the same as the Spectrum view, but has a blue bar between the markers that indicates the measured output power level. The bar graph is activated when the “Bar Graph”...
Page 194 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Measure Trace See: "Measure Trace" on page 825. Power Results Total carrier power, total PSD and total format carrier power are displayed in the lower window. Total format carrier power is total power of carriers of the same Radio Format.
Page 195 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Integ Bw) multiplied by the number of carriers with carrier measure state setting to yes. RF-BW Displays the total bandwidth from the lowest carrier to the highest carrier, whether their measurement states are on or off. Carrier Power This is the power in all the currently defined carriers.
Page 196 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement This is the total power of all the carriers with carrier measure state setting to On. The power is calculated by integrating across the bandwidth declared by the Carrier Integ Bw parameter for each carrier and then totaling the sums. The total integration bandwidth is shown as part of the result.
Page 197 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Parameter Set Displays which format parameter set is selected. 3.2.2.3 Gate Window #3 Turning on Gate View displays the Gate Window, which allows you to see your gating signal at the same time as the measured data. See the description under "Gate View On/Off"...
Page 198 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement :DISPlay:CHPower:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <real> Remote Command :DISPlay:CHPower:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel? :DISP:CHP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV 10 dBm Example :DISP:CHP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV? Couplings When "Auto Scaling" on page 199 (default), this value is automatically determined by the measurement result. When you set a value manually, Auto Scaling changes to Attenuation is not coupled to Ref Value Preset 10.00 dBm...
Page 199 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Scale Range Sets the Y-Axis scale range. Remote Command Replace <meas> with the identifier for the current measurement :DISPlay:<meas>:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RANGe <rel_ampl> :DISPlay:<meas>:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RANGe? :DISP:CHP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RANG 100 Example :DISP:CHP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RANG? Couplings Coupled to Scale/Div as follows Scale Range = Scale/Div * 10 (number of divisions) When you change this value, Auto Scaling automatically changes to Preset 100 dB...
Page 200 Meas Preset. Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are disabled, as the expected input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control.
Page 201 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Dual-Attenuator Configurations Configuration 1: Mechanical attenuator + optional electronic attenuator Configuration 2: Mechanical attenuator, no optional electronic attenuator Note that Configuration 2 is not strictly speaking a dual-section attenuator, since there is no electronic section available. However, it behaves exactly like Configuration 1 without the Electronic Attenuator Option EA3, therefore for the sake of this document it is grouped into the “Dual-Attenuator”...
Page 202 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement (Note that depending on the measurement, there may be no Auto/Man functionality on the Mech Atten control.) In the Single-Attenuator configuration, you control the attenuation with a single control, as the fixed stage has only two states. In the Dual-Attenuator configuration, both stages have significant range, so you are given separate control of the mechanical and electronic attenuator stages.
Page 203 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement On the Meas Bar, the field “Atten” displays as follows: – If the sweep is entirely < 50 GHz, the value shown after “Atten:” is equal to Mech Atten + Elec Atten + Full Range Atten –...
Page 204 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Auto/Man is remembered and restored when the electronic attenuator is once again disabled. This is described in more detail in "Elec Atten" on page 1756 "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 205 for more information on the Auto/Man functionality Couplings If the RF Input Port is the RF Input:...
Page 205 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement For example: Dual-Attenuator configuration: Atten: 24 dB (e14) Indicating the total attenuation is at 24 dB and the electronic attenuation is at 14 dB Single-Attenuator configuration: A: 24 dB (e14) Indicating the total attenuation is at 24 dB and the “soft” attenuation is at 14 dB (see below for definition of “soft”...
Page 206 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Note that in configurations that include an Electronic Attenuator, this switch is only shown when the Electronic Attenuator is disabled. In other measurements, Mech Atten has no Auto/Man function. In these measurements, no switch is shown on the Mech Atten control: Mech Atten also appears with no switch, as above, in configurations that include an Electronic Attenuator but when the Electronic Attenuator is enabled.
Page 207 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement control and the Meas Bar The electronic attenuator, and the “soft” attenuation function provided in Single-Attenuator config- urations, are unavailable above the low band (0-3.6 GHz, 0-3.4 GHz, 0-3 GHz, depending on the model). If the low band range is from 0-3.6 GHz, and Stop Frequency of the instrument is > 3.6 GHz, then the Enabled/Disabled section of the Elec Atten control will be and grayed-out "Internal Preamp"...
Page 208 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement :POW:EATT:STAT? Preset (Disabled) for Swept SA measurement (Enabled) for all other measurements that support the electronic attenuator The maximum Center Frequency for Low Band can change based on the NOTE selected IFBW for measurements that support IFBW (for example, Waveform measurement across all Modes that support it).
Page 209 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement – The Electronic Attenuator is set to 10 dB less than the previous value of the Mechanical Attenuator, within the limitation that it must stay within the range of 0 to 24 dB of attenuation Examples in the Dual-Attenuator configuration: –...
Page 210 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement electrical attenuator. With the mechanical attenuator, TOI, SHI, and compression threshold levels increase dB-for-dB with increasing attenuation, and the noise floor does as well. With the electronic attenuator, there is an excess attenuation of about 1 to 3 dB between 0 and 3.6 GHz, making the effective TOI, SHI, and so forth, less well known.
Page 211 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping If this function is ON, it applies the adjustment described under "Adjust Atten for Min Clipping" on page 1759 each time a measurement restarts. Therefore, in Continuous measurement mode, it only executes before the first measurement. In Dual-Attenuator models, you can set Elec+Mech Atten, in which case both attenuators participate in the autoranging, or Elec Atten Only, in which case the mechanical attenuator does not participate in the autoranging.
Page 212 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Range Dual-Attenuator models: Off | Elec Atten Only | Mech + Elec Atten Single-Attenuator models: Off | On Backwards Compatibility Command Notes aliases to "Elec Atten Only" (:POW:RANG:OPT:ATT ELEC) aliases to "Off" (:POW:RANG:OPT:ATT OFF) :POW:RANG:AUTO? :POW:RANG:OPT:ATT...
Page 213 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Single-Attenuator Models Dual-Attenuator models "Adjust Atten for Min Clipping" on page 1759 "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 211 selection is Mech + Elec Atten: WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 214 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 215 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 211 selection is Elec Only. Note that the Mech Atten value is not adjusted, and the value previously set is used. Therefore, there is a case that IF Overload is still observed depending on the input signal level and the Mech Atten setting.
Page 216 All other models: 2 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state 3.2.3.3 Range (Non-attenuator models) Only available for Keysight’s modular signal analyzers and certain other Keysight products, such as VXT and M941xE. State Saved Range Represents the amplitude of the largest sinusoidal signal that could be present within the IF without being clipped by the ADC.
Page 217 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Adjust Range for Min Clipping Sets the combination of attenuation and gain based on the current measured signal level so that clipping will be at a minimum. This is an "immediate action" function, that is, it executes once, when the key is pressed.
Page 218 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Peak-to-Average Ratio Used with "Range (Non-attenuator models)" on page 1769 to optimize the level control in the instrument. The value is the ratio, in dB, of the peak power to the average power of the signal to be measured. A ratio of 0 should be used for sinusoidal signals;...
Page 219 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Mixer Lvl Offset This is an advanced setting to adjust target Range at the input mixer, which in turn affects the signal level in the instrument’s IF. This setting can be used when additional optimization is needed after setting "Peak-to-Average Ratio"...
Page 220 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement between Start Freq and Stop Freq, the instrument first performs a peak search, and then performs centering on the marker’s center frequency. The value displayed on "Preselector Adjust" on page 1774 changes to reflect the new preselector tuning.
Page 221 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement search to find 2. If the selected marker is already On, the instrument attempts the centering at that marker’s frequency. There is no preselector for signals below about 3.6 GHz, so if the marker is on a signal below 3.6 GHz, no centering is attempted, and an advisory message is generated 3.
Page 222 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement State Saved The Preselector Adjust value set by "Presel Center" on page 1773, or by manually adjusting Preselector Adjust Not saved in instrument state, and does not survive a Preset or power cycle Min/Max –/+500 MHz [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PADJust...
Page 223 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement The maximum Center Frequency for Low Band, displayed in square brackets, NOTE can change based on the selected IFBW for measurements that support IFBW (for example, Waveform measurement across all Modes that support it). In certain models (such as N9042B &...
Page 224 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement LNA is an additional preamplifier that provides superior DANL and frequency range compared to "Internal Preamp" on page 1775. LNA provides lower system noise figure, especially at frequencies above 100 MHz, and can be operated up to the full range of 50 GHz instruments.
Page 225 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement µW Path Control Options for this control include µW Preselector Bypass (Option MPB), Low Noise Path (Option LNP) and Full Bypass Enable in the High Band path circuits. When the µW Preselector is bypassed, flatness is improved, but will be subject to spurs from out of band interfering signals.
Page 226 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH STD | LNPath | MPBypass | FULL Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH? :POW:MW:PATH LNP Example Enables the Low Noise path :POW:MW:PATH? Notes When "Presel Center" on page 1773 is performed, the instrument momentarily switches to the Standard Path, regardless of the setting of µW Path Control The DC Block will always be switched in when the low noise path is switched in, to protect succeeding circuitry from DC.
Page 227 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Annotation In the Meas Bar, if the Standard path is chosen: µW Path: Standard If Low Noise Path is enabled but the LNP switch is not thrown: µW Path: LNP,Off If the Low Noise Path is enabled and the LNP switch is thrown: µW Path: LNP,On If the preselector is bypassed: µW Path: Bypass...
Page 228 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Always Presel Bypass Always Presel Bypass Spurious Always Standard Path Emissions WLAN Mode Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Modulation Always Presel Bypass Analysis Spectral Flatness Always Presel Bypasss Power vs Time Always Presel Bypass Monitor Spectrum...
Page 229 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Emissions Transmit On|Off Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and Info BW > 15 MHz, in Power which case choose Preselector Bypass Channel Quality Mode Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Group Delay Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency >...
Page 230 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement whether or not the Low Noise Path Enable is selected in the user interface. The only time the Low Noise Path is used is when Low Noise Path Enable is selected, the sweep is completely in High Band (> 3.6 GHz) and no preamp is in use. For measurements that use IQ acquisition, the low noise path is used when Center Frequency is in High Band (>...
Page 231 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement There are other times where selecting the low noise path improves performance, too. Compression-limited measurements such as finding the nulls in a pulsed-RF spectrum can profit from the low noise path in a way similar to the TOI-limited measurement illustrated.
Page 232 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Option MPB or pre-selector bypass provides an unpreselected input mixer path for certain X-Series signal analyzers with frequency ranges above 3.6 GHz. This signal path allows a wider bandwidth and less amplitude variability, which is an advantage when doing modulation analysis and broadband signal analysis.
Page 233 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement whenever Full Bypass Enable is selected, a warning message appears in the status bar: “Full Bypass Enabled, maximum safe input power reduced” Microwave Preselector Bypass Backwards Compatibility Example Bypass the microwave preselector: :POW:MW:PRES OFF Notes Included for Microwave Preselector Bypass backwards compatibility STD)
Page 234 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Settings Alert message in the error queue Allow Full Bypass in Auto Enable or disable Full Bypass in µW Path Auto rule. See "µW Path Control" on page 1778. When this function is ON, and "µW Path Control"...
Page 235 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Software Preselection Provided in some instruments, either to compensate for issues with provided hardware preselection or to provide the preselection function when there is no hardware preselector. N9041B Software Preselection compensates for the frequency range limit of the microwave preselector.
Page 236 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement traces is used. This provides a method to reduce spurs that are internally generated within the VXT, but you should note the following when using Software Preselection: – There is some speed cost due to the need to take multiple captures –...
Page 237 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement – NORMal - mathematically removes all image and multiple responses of signals present at the input – ADVanced - any trace processing (such as “max hold” or trace averaging) is performed on the points of both candidate traces before the “select minimum” operation occurs.
Page 238 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement method Grayed-out when "Software Preselection" on page 1788 is OFF. The grayout message is “Unavailable unless SW Presel enabled” For N9042B+V3050A, the parameter is SCPI-only, and always set to NARRow when Software Preselection is enabled Preset NORMal N9041B...
Page 239 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Meas Mode Preset BASIC, WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA WCDMA WCDMA PCON WCDMA EVMQ WCDMA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA...
Page 240 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Res BW Activates the resolution bandwidth active function, which allows you to manually set the resolution bandwidth (RBW) of the instrument. Normally, Res BW (Auto) selects automatic coupling of Res BW to "Span" on page 258, using the ratio set by Span:3 dB RBW (some measurements do not have a Span:3 dB RBW control, in which case the measurement chooses the optimal ratio).
Page 241 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement [:SENSe]:CHPower:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO? Command :CHP:BAND:AUTO ON Example :CHP:BAND:AUTO? RBW Presets Mode Preset Value LTEAFDD Auto LTEATDD Auto 100 kHz NR5G Auto Auto SRCOMMS 3.9 kHz 240 kHz WCDMA 240 kHz WLAN 100 kHz More Information When Res BW is set to Auto, the bandwidth selected depends on "RBW Filter Type"...
Page 242 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Bandwidth Auto RBW, kHz 5 MHz 10 MHz 15 MHz 20 MHz 25 MHz 30 MHz 35 MHz 40 MHz 45 MHz 50 MHz 60 MHz 70 MHz 1000 80 MHz 1100 90 MHz 1300 100 MHz 1500...
Page 243 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement :CHP:BAND:VID? Notes For numeric entries, the instrument chooses the nearest (arithmetically, on a linear scale, rounding up) available VBW to the value entered. The 50 MHz VBW is defined to mean “wide open” The values shown in this table reflect the conditions after a Mode Preset Dependencies Sometimes the displayed Video BW is not actually used to process the trace data: When the Average Detector is selected and Sweep Type is set to Swept, the video bandwidth filter...
Page 244 RBW Filter Type Selects the type for the resolution bandwidth filters. Historically, the Res BW filters in HP/Agilent/Keysight spectrum instruments were Gaussian filters, specified using the –3 dB bandwidth of the filter. That is, a 10 MHz Res BW filter was a Gaussian shape with its –3 dB points 10 MHz apart.
Page 245 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement 3.2.5 Display Lets you configure display items for the current Mode, Measurement View or Window. 3.2.5.1 Meas Display Contains controls for setting up the display for the current Measurement, View or Window. Bar Graph On/Off Turns the Bar Graph On or Off.
Page 246 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Y-Axis Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Backwards Compatibility :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe]? SCPI This command is accepted for backwards compatibility with older instruments, but the WINDow, TRACe GRID parameters are ignored...
Page 247 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement :DISPlay:ANNotation:TRACe[:STATe]? :DISP:ANN:TRAC OFF Example Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Control Annotation Turns on and off the display of values on the Active Function controls for all measurements in the current Mode. This is a security feature. :DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe]?
Page 248 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement 1. To increase speed as much as possible by freeing the instrument from having to update the display 2. To reduce emissions from the display, drive circuitry 3. For security purposes If you have turned off the display: –...
Page 249 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Set by :SYST:DEF MISC, but not affected by *RST :SYSTem:PRESet State Saved Not saved in instrument state Backwards :SYST:PRES no longer turns on :DISPlay:ENABle as it did in legacy analyzers Compatibility Notes 3.2.5.3 View Contains controls for selecting the current View, and for editing User Views.
Page 250 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Backwards The legacy node Compatibility :DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] SCPI is retained for backwards compatibility, but it only supports predefined views Restore Layout to Default Restores the Layout to the default for Basic. Modified Views are very temporary; if you exit the current measurement they are discarded, and they are not saved in State.
Page 251 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Rename User View You can rename the current View by giving it a new unique name. Only User Views can be renamed, if the current View is a Predefined View, an error occurs. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:REName <alphanumeric>...
Page 252 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement :DISP:VIEW:ADV:DEL:ALL Example Notes Disabled if there are no User Views View Editor Remote Commands The following remote commands help you manage Views and User Views. Note that the SCPI node for User Views handles both Predefined and User Views. The legacy nodes, :DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] and :DISPlay:VIEW:NSEL, are retained for...
Page 253 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement 3.2.6 Frequency Contains controls that allow you to control the frequency and channel parameters of the instrument. Some features in the Frequency menu are the same for all measurements in the current Mode – they do not change as you change measurements. Settings like these are called “Meas Global”...
Page 254 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement – "I/Q Center Freq" on page 258 – "Center Frequency Presets" on page 254 – "VXT Models with Radio Heads/CIU Frequency Range" on page 256 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer? Example Set Center Frequency to 50 MHz: :FREQ:CENT 50 MHz Increment the Center Frequency by the value of CF Step: :FREQ:CENT UP...
Page 255 3.755 GHz 7.5 GHz 7.575 GHz F13 (CXA-m) 6.805 GHz 13.6 GHz 13.8 GHz F26 (CXA-m) 13.255 GHz 26.5 GHz 26.55 GHz 504 (M9421A, M8920A) 2.145 GHz 3.88GHz 3.88 GHz 506 (M9421A, M8920A) 3.245 GHz 6.08GHz 6.08 GHz F06 (M9410A/11A) 1.0 GHz 6.08 GHz 6.08 GHz...
Page 256 The following table shows the Center Frequency Presets and Range for VXT modes with Radio Heads/CIU. Products with Radio Heads/CIU Preset Start frequency Stop frequency M9421A + CIU 6 GHz 5.9 GHz 12 GHz M9410A + CIU 6 GHz 5.9 GHz...
Page 257 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement [:SENSe]:FREQuency:RF:CENTer? :FREQ:RF:CENT 30 MHz Example :FREQ:RF:CENT? Notes This command is the same in all Modes, but the parameter is Measurement Global, so the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Dependencies If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set Center Frequency such that the Stop Frequency would be >3.6 GHz fails and results in an advisory message...
Page 258 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement in the Harmonic Table When Restore Input/Output Defaults is performed, the mixer presets to the 11970A values, whose Start and Stop frequencies are 26.5 and 40 GHz respectively. The center of these two frequencies is 33.25 GHz Therefore, following Restore Input/Output Defaults, if you go into External Mixing and do a Mode Preset while in Spectrum Analyzer Mode, the resulting Center Frequency is 33.25 GHz...
Page 259 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement If the RRC Filter is on, then span is increased by a factor of 1 + Filter Alpha. "Span Presets" on page 260 [:SENSe]:CHPower:FREQuency:SPAN <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:CHPower:FREQuency:SPAN? :CHP:FREQ:SPAN 10 MHz Example :CHP:FREQ:SPAN? Dependencies If the electrical attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set Span such that the Stop Frequency would be >3.6 GHz results in an error...
Page 260 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement If the knob or step keys are being used, depends on the value of the other three interdependent parameters Center Frequency, Start Frequency, Stop Frequency Annunciation Data out of range, value clipped to upper limit Annotation Span <value>...
Page 261 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Freq Option Max Span (can't set higher than this) (MXE) 526, F26 26.55 GHz (CXA, CXA-m) 44.5 GHz 52 GHz 5.75 GHz (VXT models M9410A/11A) F06 & EP6 6.27 GHz (VXT models M9410A/11A) F06 &...
Page 262 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Mode Radio Std Preset Value WLAN 802.11a/g(OFDM/DSSS-OFDM) 30 MHz 802.11b 37.5 MHz 802.11n/ac/ax/be 20MHz 30 MHz 802.11n/ac/ax/be 40MHz 60 MHz 802.11n/ac/ax/be 80 MHz 120 MHz 802.11n/ac/ax/be 160 MHz 240 MHz 802.11n/ac/ax/be 80 MHz + 80 MHz 360 MHz 802.11be 320 MHz 480MHz...
Page 263 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Auto Function [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO? :FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON Example :FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO? Full Span (Remote Command Only) Changes the span to show the full frequency range of the instrument. It maximizes the span within a range not changing the center frequency.
Page 264 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement 3.2.7.2 Settings The controls on this tab include the Marker active function and a radio button selection of the marker control mode (Normal, Delta, or Off) for the selected marker, as well as additional functions that help you use markers. Marker Frequency Sets the marker X Axis value in the current marker X Axis Scale unit.
Page 265 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement trace points . When a marker is turned on, it is placed at the center of the screen on the trace. Therefore, the default value depends on instrument condition. If the marker is Off, the response is Not A Number Preset After a preset, all markers are turned Off, so the query returns Not A Number (NAN)
Page 266 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement POSition|DELTa|OFF Range Annotation Mkr # <X value> and <Marker value> upper right on graph When Marker Trace is Polar in WCDMA mode: Mkr # <Chip Value (RHO & QPSKEVM)/Symbol Value (CDP)>, <X value> and <Y value> upper right on graph Backwards Compatibility SCPI Commands Sets or queries the state of a marker.
Page 267 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement 3.2.7.3 Peak Search The controls on this tab let you move the marker to selected peaks of the signal, giving you enormous analysis capabilities, particularly when combined with "Marker Delta" on page 267. Pressing the Peak Search hardkey automatically moves you to the Peak Search NOTE page of the Marker menu and performs a peak search.
Page 268 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement The control is duplicated here to allow you to conveniently perform a peak search and change the marker’s control mode to Delta without having to access two separate menus. 3.2.7.4 Properties The controls on this tab are used to set certain properties of the selected marker. Marker Frequency This is the fundamental control that you use to move a marker around on the trace.
Page 269 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Marker Trace Selects the trace on which you want your marker placed. A marker is associated with one and only one trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X- Axis Scale of the marker.
Page 270 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Avg/Hold Number Specifies the number of measurement averages used to calculate the measurement result. The average is displayed at the end of each sweep. After the specified number of average counts, the averaging mode (terminal control) setting determines the averaging action.
Page 271 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement – EXPonential: The measurement averaging continues using the specified number of averages to compute each exponentially-weighted averaged value. The average is displayed at the end of each sweep – REPeat: The measurement resets the average counter each time the specified number of averages is reached [:SENSe]:CHPower:AVERage:TCONtrol EXPonential | REPeat Remote...
Page 272 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Mode Radio Std Integ BW WLAN 802.11a/g(OFDM/DSSS-OFDM) 20 MHz 802.11b 25 MHz 802.11n/ac/ax/be (20MHz) 20 MHz 802.11n/ac/ax/be (40MHz) 40 MHz 802.11n/ac/ax/be (80MHz) 80 MHz 802.11ax/be (80 MHz + 80 MHz) 80 MHz 802.11ac/ax/be (160 MHz) 160 MHz 802.11be (160 MHz + 160MHz) 160 MHz...
Page 273 This is not annotated or reflected on any control; there are no controls grayed out nor any SCPI locked out. The instrument simply behaves as though both FFT IF Gain and Swept IF Gain are set to Low regardless of the setting on the controls Not available in VXT model M9421A Preset State Saved...
Page 274 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement This is to alert you that measurement accuracy might be negatively impacted. [:SENSe]:CHPower:SAVoid[:STATe] ON | OFF | 0 | 1 Remote Command [:SENSe]:CHPower:SAVoid[:STATe]? :CHP:SAV ON Example :CHP:SAV? Dependencies Only appears in VXT models M9410A/11A/15A Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state...
Page 275 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement while in Zero Span. Nonetheless, if Auto Couple were executed while in Zero Span, it would set RBW to Auto "behind the scenes" so that, on exit from Zero Span, it would be in Auto. Any Auto/Man selection specific (local) to the other measurements in the current Mode are not affected by Auto Couple.
Page 276 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement – Resolution Bandwidth – Fundamental Frequency – Dwell Time – Range Table Resolution Bandwidths – Range Table Dwell Times Meas Preset Restores all measurement parameters to their default values. :CONFigure:CHPower Remote Command :CONF:CHP Example 3.2.8.2 Radio Contains controls to select Radio Standard and settings.
Page 277 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement [:SENSe]:RADio:STANdard[:WLAN] AG | BG | GDO | N20 | N40 AC20 | AC40 | AC80 | Remote ACT80 | AC160 | AH1 | AH2 | AH4 | AH8 | AH16 | JP10 | P5 | AF6 | AF7 | AF8 | Command AX20 | AX40 | AX80 | AXT80 | AX160 | BE20 | BE40 | BE80 | BE160 | BE320 [:SENSe]:RADio:STANdard[:WLAN]?
Page 278 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Notes This parameter is normally used when TETRA is selected as the Radio Std Dependencies For WLAN 802.11 ac (80 + 80 MHz ), RRC Weighted is not supported Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Integration BW | RRC Weighted RRC Filter Alpha...
Page 279 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Min/Max 100 Hz / 100 MHz [:SENSe]:CHPower:FILTer[:RRC]:BWIDth Backwards Compatibility SCPI 3.2.8.4 Limits Lets you set up the test limit for channel power or power spectral density. When DVB-T radio standard is selected in SA Mode, this functionality is disabled, and the input signal is instead compared against a pre-defined spectrum mask.
Page 280 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Preset 16.00 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max –/+200.0 Auto Function :CALCulate:CHPower:LIMit:POWer:STATe OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :CALCulate:CHPower:LIMit:POWer:STATe? :CALC:CHP:LIM:POW:STAT ON Example :CALC:CHP:LIM:POW:STAT? Preset WLAN Mode: All other Modes: State Saved OFF|ON Range...
Page 281 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement (or power) limit individually, and the test passes only when both values are lower than the limit Couplings The value is automatically converted when PSD Unit is changed Preset WLAN mode or SA mode with WLAN radio standard: 4.00 dBm/MHz Otherwise: 4.00 dBm/Hz State Saved Saved in instrument state...
Page 282 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement :CALCulate:CHPower:LIMit:PSD:FAIL? Remote Command :CALC:CHP:LIM:PSD:FAIL? Example Notes Query only When "PSD Limit" on page 280 state is OFF, the returned value is always 0 (pass) When PSD Limit state is ON, the returned value is 0 (pass) if PSD test passes and 1(fail) if PSD test fails 3.2.8.5 Advanced Contains controls for setting advanced functions of the instrument.
Page 283 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Parameter Options, Installed Options & Ranges The Phase Noise Optimization control lets you optimize the setup and behavior of the Local Oscillator (LO) depending on your specific measurement conditions. You may wish to trade off noise and speed, for example, to make a measurement faster without regard to noise or with optimum noise characteristics without regard to speed.
Page 284 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement The LO phase noise is optimized for smaller offsets from the carrier, at the expense of phase noise farther out. The actual frequency offset within which noise is optimized is shown with in square brackets, as this can vary depending on the hardware set in use.
Page 285 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement The actual frequency offset beyond which noise is optimized is shown with in square brackets, as this can vary depending on the hardware set in use. For example, in some instruments this annotation appears as [offset >30 kHz] In instruments with Option EP0, the LO is configured for the best possible phase noise at offsets up to 600 kHz from the carrier whenever there are no significant spurs within the span observed with an on-screen carrier.
Page 286 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Models with Option Conditions Selection Center frequency is < 699.9 kHz "Balanced" on page 284 Models with option EP0 have a two stage local oscillator, which switches Span > 114.1 MHz, or "Fast Tuning" on to a single loop for fast tuning page 285 RBW >...
Page 287 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Models with Option Conditions Selection Note that in these models, the Source Mode is set to “Tracking” hardware does not actually provide for an extra-fast tuning option, so the Center frequency is < 25 kHz, or "Best Close-in"...
Page 288 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Noise Floor Extension Lets you turn on/configure the Noise Floor Extension (NFE) function. Some Modes (such as Spectrum Analyzer Mode), support two states of NFE, Full and Adaptive. FULL state (in Modes which do not support Adaptive NFE) matches the state (in Modes that do support Adaptive NFE).
Page 289 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement the introduction of Adaptive NFE (firmware version A.18.00), the default state of NFE was for all Modes. With the introduction of Adaptive NFE, the menu control is changed from On|Off to Full|Adaptive|Off. For SCPI Backwards Compatibility, the existing SCPI command to turn NFE on or off was retained, and a new command was added to set the state to turn Adaptive On or Off: –...
Page 290 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Preset Not affected by Mode Preset, but set to at startup and by Restore Mode Defaults State Saved More Information The instrument is characterized in the factory (or during a field calibration) with a model of the noise, referred to the input mixer, versus frequency in each band and path combination.
Page 291 On instruments with the NF2 license installed, the calibrated Noise Floor used by Noise Floor Extensions should be refreshed periodically. Keysight recommends that the Characterize Noise Floor operation be performed after the first 500 hours of operation, and once every calendar year.
Page 292 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement when you set Global Center Freq to ON, it applies to all Modes that support Global settings. Other controls (for example, Extend Low Band) are actually set in this menu, but apply to all Modes. Global Center Freq The software maintains a Mode Global value called Global Center Freq.
Page 293 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Adjusting the EMC Std of any Mode that supports Global settings, while Global EMC Std is modifies the Global EMC Std. When Global EMC Std is switched OFF, the EMC Std of the current Mode remains unchanged, but now the EMC Std of each Mode is once again independent.
Page 294 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Sweep Time Controls the time the instrument takes to sweep the current frequency span in swept measurements, displays the sweep time in swept measurements, and displays the equivalent Sweep Time in FFT measurements. When Sweep Time is in Auto, the instrument computes a time that will give accurate measurements based on other settings, such as RBW and VBW.
Page 295 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement values are as follows: – IBW: 29 ms – IBWR: 108 ms – FAST 7.5 ms Dependencies On non-sweeping hardware, this control is grayed out, and the Auto/Man toggle disappears. The read-only control shows estimated sweep time In those instruments, "Minimum Acquisition Time"...
Page 296 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Minimum Acquisition Time Available on non-sweeping hardware. Specifies the minimum acquisition time for each “chunk” of the measurement result. The instrument automatically divides Span into multiple chunks if needed. Therefore, the total signal acquisition time for the entire Span is: ~(>~Minimum Acquisition Time) * (The number of chunks) When in Auto, this parameter’s value is determined by other parameters, such as Span, RBW and VBW.
Page 297 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement <meas> is the identifier for the current measurement; any one of CHPower- |ACPower|OBWidth|MONitor Example Channel Power measurement: :CHP:SWE:ACQ:TIME:AUTO OFF Preset Sweep/Measure Lets you toggle between Continuous and Single sweep or measurement operation. The single/continuous state is Meas Global, so the setting affects all measurements. The front-panel key Single/Cont performs exactly the same function "More Information"...
Page 298 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement keeps sweeping See the Trace key description under Trace Average for the averaging formula used both before and after the Average/Hold Num is reached. The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The type of trace processing for multiple sweeps is set under the Trace key, with choices of Trace Average, Max Hold, or Min Hold Single Mode...
Page 299 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Restart Restarts the current sweep, or measurement, or set of averaged/held sweeps or measurements. If you are Paused, pressing Restart performs a Resume. The front-panel key Restart performs exactly the same function. The Restart function is accessed in several ways: –...
Page 300 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement If the instrument is in the process of aligning when a Restart is executed, the alignment finishes before the restart function is performed. Even when set for Single operation, multiple sweeps may be taken when Restart is pressed (for example, when averaging/holding is on).
Page 301 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Event Trace Effect Min Hold pressed (even if already in Min Hold) Set to maxtracevalue Trace Average pressed (even if already in Trace Trace data unaffected but start new Average) sweep/avg/hold Restart pressed Trace data unaffected but start new sweep/avg/hold Parameter requiring restart changed (e.g., RBW)
Page 302 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Abort (Remote Command Only) Stops the current measurement. Aborts the current measurement as quickly as possible, resets the sweep and trigger systems, and puts the measurement into an :ABORt "idle" state. If the instrument is in the process of aligning when is sent, the alignment finishes before the abort function is performed, so :ABORt...
Page 303 [:SENSe]:CHPower:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes NORMal | ACCuracy Remote Command [:SENSe]:CHPower:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes? :CHP:SWE:TIME:AUTO:RUL NORM Example :CHP:SWE:TIME:AUTO:RUL? Dependencies Does not appear in Spectrum Analyzer Mode in VXT model M9421A NORMal Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state NORMal|ACCuracy Range Points Sets the number of points taken per sweep, and displayed in the traces.
Page 304 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement speed. Decreasing the number of points does not decrease the sweep time, but it may speed up the measurement, depending on the other sweep settings (for example, in FFT sweeps). Fewer points will always speed up the I/O. Due to minimum sweep rate limitations of the hardware, the minimum sweep time available to the user will increase above its normal value of 1 ms as the number of sweep points increases above 15001.
Page 305 IF Dithering Lets you turn IF Dithering on or off. This is a technique used in unpreselected instruments (such as Keysight’s modular instruments) to enhance the rejection of images and internally-generated spurious signals. [:SENSe]:SWEep:IF:DITHer OFF | ON | 0 | 1...
Page 306 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Select Trace appears above the menu panel, indicating that it applies to all controls in the menu panel. Select Trace is blanked if you select a tab whose controls do not depend on the selected trace (for example, Trace Function). Notes The selected trace is remembered even when not in the Trace menu Dependencies...
Page 307 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Option Parameter SCPI Example Details MAXHold :TRAC3:TYPE MAXH Maximum Hold See: "Max Hold" on page 311 MINHold :TRAC5:TYPE MINH Minimum Hold See: "Min Hold" on page 311 Full descriptions of each type are provided below. You may select one of these types for each trace.
Page 308 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement In X-Series, trace averaging can be done on a per-trace basis. The Trace Modes (now called Trace Types) are Clear/Write, Trace Average, Max Hold and Min Hold. View and Blank are set separately under "View/Blank"...
Page 309 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement – :TRACe:MODE BLANk sets :TRACe:UPDate OFF, :TRACe:DISPlay OFF, for the selected trace The query returns the same value as :TRACe:TYPE?, meaning that if you set :TRACe:MODE:VIEW or :TRACe:MODE:BLANk, the query response will not be what you sent :TRACe[n]:MODE was formerly used to set the type or “writing mode”...
Page 310 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Pressing Clear/Write for the selected trace, or sending :TRAC:TYPE WRIT for the specified trace, sets the trace type to Clear/Write and clears the trace, even if you are already in Clear/Write. Then a new sweep is initiated. Trigger conditions must be met before the sweep actually starts, and if in Single the sweep won’t start until Restart is pressed.
Page 311 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Max Hold The instrument maintains and displays a max hold trace, which represents the maximum data value on a point-by-point basis of the new trace data and previous trace data. Details of the count limiting behavior may be found under Avg|Hold Number under Meas Setup.
Page 312 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Clear and Write | Restart Averaging | Restart Max/Min Hold Starts the trace writing, as though the "Trace Type" on page 1728 had just been selected. The effect is exactly the same as reselecting the current Trace Type again –...
Page 313 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Couplings Selecting a Trace Type for a trace (pressing the key or sending the equivalent command) puts the trace in Active (Update and Display ON), even if that trace type was already selected Selecting a detector for a trace (pressing the key or sending [:SENS]:DET:TRAC) puts the trace in Active (UpdateON...
Page 314 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Example Make trace 1 visible: :TRAC2:DISP 1 Blank trace 3: :TRAC3:DISP 3 Couplings Whenever you set Update to for any trace, the Display is set to for that trace Preset For Swept SA Measurement (in SA Mode): 1|0|0|0|0|0 for Trace 1;...
Page 315 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement 3.2.10.3 Math Lets you turn on and configure Trace Math functions. Math Function Trace Math functions perform mathematical operations between traces and, in some cases, user-specified offsets. When in a Trace Math function, the indicated function is performed during the sweep with the math function used in place of a detector.
Page 316 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement :CALC:MATH TRACE3,LDIF,TRACE1,TRACE2,0,-6.00 Sets Trace 3 to Log Diff trace math function, sets the First Trace operand (for Trace 3) to Trace 1, sets the Second Trace operand (for Trace 3) to Trace 2, and sets the Log Difference reference (for Trace 3) to -6 dBm :CALC:MATH TRACE1,OFF,TRACE2,TRACE3,0,0 Turns off trace math for trace 1...
Page 317 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Trace Math Options To generate a trace math result, you must take a sweep . The trace math engine, IMPORTANT described below, operates in concert with the sweep engine in the instrument. Until a sweep has been taken, even if the constituent traces are not in Update mode, no result is generated.
Page 318 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement DestinationTrace = 10 log(10(1/10)(FirstTrace) + 10(1/10)(SecondTrace)) The values of the trace points are assumed to be in a decibel scale, as they are internally stored. If a point in either trace operand is equal to maxtracevalue, the resultant point is also maxtracevalue.
Page 319 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement The values of the operand trace points are assumed to be in decibel units (as they are internally stored) and the reference is in dBm so the result is in dBm. Example: If the first operand trace 1 is at 5 dBm, the second operand trace 2 is at –5 dBm, and the reference is –25 dBm, then the destination trace will be –15 dBm.
Page 320 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement For each active trace, the current trace point is processed for Trace 1, then Trace 2, then Trace 3, etc. Trace data is taken from either the detector for that trace, or WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 321 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement from the mathematical result of up to two other traces and an offset, depending on whether trace math is on or not. The resultant data is then fed to the Average/Hold processing block, where (if the trace type is Average, Max Hold, or Min Hold) it is processed with previous trace data.
Page 322 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement 5; for Trace 6, it presets to Trace 4 Operand 2: Trace number minus 1 (wraps at 1). For example, for Trace 1, Operand 2 presets to Trace 6; for Trace 6, it presets to Trace 5 State Saved Operands 1 and 2 for each trace are stored in instrument state Offset...
Page 323 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Option Parameter Detector Behavior functions, average type, and the trace averaging function This option is set using "Detector Select Auto/Man" on page 324 NORMal Normal The detector determines the peak of the CW-like signals, and it yields alternating maximums and minimums of noise-like signals.
Page 324 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement – POSitive (peak) with MAXHold – NEGative (peak) with MINHold AVERage Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state NORMal|AVERage|POSitive|SAMPle|NEGative|RMS Range Detector Select Auto/Man Sets the Detector mode to Auto or Manual. In Auto, the proper detector is chosen based on rules that take into account the measurement settings and other instrument settings.
Page 325 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Preset To Trace Selects the trace to be copied from or exchanged with the "From Trace" on page 823 when a "Copy" on page 823 "Exchange" on page 824 is performed Preset Copy Executes a Trace Copy based on the "From Trace"...
Page 326 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement The X-Axis settings and domain of a trace are also copied when it is exchanged with another trace. Remote For Swept SA Measurement (in SA Mode): Command :TRACe:EXCHange TRACE1 | … | TRACE6, TRACE1 | … | TRACE6 For all other measurements: :TRACe:<meas>:EXCHange TRACe1 | TRACe2 | TRACe3, TRACe1 | TRACe2 | TRACe3 <meas>...
Page 327 3 WLAN Mode 3.2 Channel Power Measurement Measure Trace Specifies which trace’s scalar results are displayed in the Metrics window, and :READ :FETCh retrieved by sending a query: – Trace 1 – Trace 2 – Trace 3 :CALCulate:<meas>:MTRace TRACe1 | TRACe2 | TRACe3 Remote Command :CALCulate:<meas>:MTRace? <meas>...
Page 328 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement This measurement computes and displays the bandwidth occupied by a given percentage of the total mean power of a signal. Measurement Commands The general functionality of "CONFigure" on page 2568, "INITiate"...
Page 329 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Command Return Value :FETCh:OBWidth:FERRor? Returns the Transmit Frequency Error (Hz) :MEASure:OBWidth:FERRor? :READ:OBWidth:FERRor? :FETCh:OBWidth:XDB? Returns the xdB Bandwidth (Hz) :MEASure:OBWidth:XDB? :READ:OBWidth:XDB? Remote Command Results The following table describes the results returned by the FETCh, MEASure, and READ queries listed above, according to the index value n.
Page 330 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Results Returned Item Unit, if x dB Reference Power x dB Reference Power Frequency - offset frequency x dB Reference Power Frequency – absolute frequency (9.91E+37) (9.91E+37) (9.91E+37) Lower OBW boundary - offset frequency Lower OBW boundary - absolute frequency Lower OBW boundary - absolute power Lower OBW boundary - relative power...
Page 331 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Name SCPI Name SCPI # "Gate" on page 332 "Gate View On/Off" on page 2494 These are multiple-window views. When in a multiple-window view, you select a window by touching it. The menu controls may sometimes change depending on which window is selected.
Page 332 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement 3.3.1.2 OBW Boundaries Windows: "Graph" on page 332, "Metrics - OBW Boundaries" on page 335 The spectrum trace is displayed in the upper window. The lower window of OBW Results view is replaced by the OBW boundaries table in this view. Occupied bandwidth and X dB bandwidth for both lower and upper boundaries are displayed.
Page 333 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement For LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD mode only 3.3.2.2 Metrics - OBW Results Window #2 Displays the textual results of the Occupied BW measurement. View Size Position "OBW Results" on page 331 Two fifth, full width Bottom Gate One third, full width...
Page 334 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement For the LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR modes, the metric result is shown as below: Occupied Bandwidth The occupied bandwidth result is f – f where f and f are the lower and upper carrier boundary point.
Page 335 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement This is the setting parameter. See "% of OBW Power" on page 407 x dB This is the setting parameter. See "x dB" on page 408. Active Carriers In the LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR modes, the number of active carriers is displayed to show how many carriers are identified as active in auto detected mode of span, otherwise “-”...
Page 336 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement The x dB reference power result shows the power of the highest signal point within the OBW Span. x dB At Freq The x dB reference power frequency result shows the frequency of the highest signal point within the OBW Span.
Page 337 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement 3.3.3 Amplitude Activates the Amplitude menu and selects Reference Level or Reference Value as the active function, depending on the measurement. Some features in this menu apply to multiple measurements. Some other features apply only to specific measurements and their controls are blanked or grayed-out in measurements that do not support the feature.
Page 338 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Scale/Div also determines the displayed amplitude range in the log plot graph. Since there are usually 10 vertical graticule division on the display, the total amplitude range of the graph is typically 10x this amount. For example, if Scale/Div is 10 dB, then the total range of the graph is 100 dB.
Page 339 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Ref Position Positions the reference level at the top, center, or bottom of the Y Scale display. Changing the reference position does not change the reference level value. :DISPlay:OBWidth:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition TOP | CENTer | BOTTom Remote Command :DISPlay:OBWidth:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition?
Page 340 Meas Preset. Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are disabled, as the expected input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control.
Page 341 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Note that Configuration 2 is not strictly speaking a dual-section attenuator, since there is no electronic section available. However, it behaves exactly like Configuration 1 without the Electronic Attenuator Option EA3, therefore for the sake of this document it is grouped into the “Dual-Attenuator”...
Page 342 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Full Range Atten This control and Attenuator Summary only appear in N9041B, when the RF input is selected, the RF Input Port is set to RF Input 2, and the Full Range Attenuator is installed.
Page 343 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Mech Atten Labeled Mech Atten in Dual-Attenuator models, and Atten in Single-Attenuator models. In the Dual-Attenuator configuration, this control only affects the mechanical attenuator. Lets you modify the attenuation applied to the RF input signal path. This value is normally auto-coupled to Ref Level, "Internal Preamp"...
Page 344 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement 7.5 GHz to above 7.5 GHz, the attenuation setting changes to a multiple of 10 dB that is no smaller than the previous setting. For example, 4 dB attenuation changes to 10 dB Preset Auto The Auto value is 10 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state 0 dB...
Page 345 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man As described under "Attenuation" on page 1750, there are two distinct attenuator configurations available in the X-Series, the Single Attenuator and Dual-Attenuator configurations. In Dual-Attenuator configurations, we have mechanical attenuation and electronic attenuation, and current total attenuation is the sum of electronic + mechanical attenuation.
Page 346 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement This control includes an Enable/Disable toggle switch; it is only possible to enter a value for the Electronic Attenuator when this switch is in the Enable position. For more details of the Electronic Attenuator, see "More Information"...
Page 347 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Transition Rules" on page 348 Preset 0 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state 0 dB Dual-Attenuator configuration: 24 dB Single-Attenuator configuration: the total of ATT and EATT cannot exceed 50 dB. So, if the EATT is set to 24 dB first, the main attenuation cannot be greater than 26 dB and will be reduced accordingly;...
Page 348 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Mechanical Attenuator Transition Rules When the Electronic Attenuator is enabled, the Mechanical Attenuator transitions to a state that has no Auto function. Below are the rules for transitioning the Mechanical Attenuator. Note that the information below only applies to the Dual- Attenuator configurations, and only when the Electronic Attenuator is installed: When the Electronic Attenuation is enabled from a disabled state: –...
Page 349 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Using the Electronic Attenuator: Pros and Cons The electronic attenuator offers finer steps than the mechanical attenuator, has no acoustical noise, is faster, and is less subject to wear. The “finer steps” advantage of the electronic attenuator is beneficial in optimizing the alignment of the instrument dynamic range to the signal power in the front panel as well as remote use.
Page 350 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement – Electric attenuator only – Combination of Electric attenuator and Mechanical attenuator when [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize IMMediate is executed. [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:TYPE EONLy | COMBined Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:TYPE? :POW:RANG:OPT:TYPE EONL Example :POW:RANG:OPT:TYPE? Dependencies Does not appear in the Swept SA, RTSA, Monitor Spectrum and Complex Spectrum measurements Appears in the Waveform measurement in BASIC and 5G NR Modes COMBined Preset...
Page 351 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement :POW:RANG:OPT:ATT? Notes The parameter option ELECtrical sets this function to in Single-Attenuator models The parameter option COMBined is mapped to ELECtrical in Single-Attenuator models. If you send COMBined, it sets the function to and returns ELEC to a query...
Page 352 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Single-Attenuator Models Dual-Attenuator models "Adjust Atten for Min Clipping" on page 1759 "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 350 selection is Mech + Elec Atten: WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 353 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 354 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 350 selection is Elec Only. Note that the Mech Atten value is not adjusted, and the value previously set is used. Therefore, there is a case that IF Overload is still observed depending on the input signal level and the Mech Atten setting.
Page 355 All other models: 2 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state 3.3.3.3 Range (Non-attenuator models) Only available for Keysight’s modular signal analyzers and certain other Keysight products, such as VXT and M941xE. State Saved Range Represents the amplitude of the largest sinusoidal signal that could be present within the IF without being clipped by the ADC.
Page 356 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Adjust Range for Min Clipping Sets the combination of attenuation and gain based on the current measured signal level so that clipping will be at a minimum. This is an "immediate action" function, that is, it executes once, when the key is pressed.
Page 357 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Peak-to-Average Ratio Used with "Range (Non-attenuator models)" on page 1769 to optimize the level control in the instrument. The value is the ratio, in dB, of the peak power to the average power of the signal to be measured. A ratio of 0 should be used for sinusoidal signals;...
Page 358 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Mixer Lvl Offset This is an advanced setting to adjust target Range at the input mixer, which in turn affects the signal level in the instrument’s IF. This setting can be used when additional optimization is needed after setting "Peak-to-Average Ratio"...
Page 359 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement between Start Freq and Stop Freq, the instrument first performs a peak search, and then performs centering on the marker’s center frequency. The value displayed on "Preselector Adjust" on page 1774 changes to reflect the new preselector tuning.
Page 360 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement search to find 2. If the selected marker is already On, the instrument attempts the centering at that marker’s frequency. There is no preselector for signals below about 3.6 GHz, so if the marker is on a signal below 3.6 GHz, no centering is attempted, and an advisory message is generated 3.
Page 361 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement State Saved The Preselector Adjust value set by "Presel Center" on page 1773, or by manually adjusting Preselector Adjust Not saved in instrument state, and does not survive a Preset or power cycle Min/Max –/+500 MHz [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PADJust...
Page 362 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement The maximum Center Frequency for Low Band, displayed in square brackets, NOTE can change based on the selected IFBW for measurements that support IFBW (for example, Waveform measurement across all Modes that support it). In certain models (such as N9042B &...
Page 363 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement LNA is an additional preamplifier that provides superior DANL and frequency range compared to "Internal Preamp" on page 1775. LNA provides lower system noise figure, especially at frequencies above 100 MHz, and can be operated up to the full range of 50 GHz instruments.
Page 364 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement µW Path Control Options for this control include µW Preselector Bypass (Option MPB), Low Noise Path (Option LNP) and Full Bypass Enable in the High Band path circuits. When the µW Preselector is bypassed, flatness is improved, but will be subject to spurs from out of band interfering signals.
Page 365 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH STD | LNPath | MPBypass | FULL Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH? :POW:MW:PATH LNP Example Enables the Low Noise path :POW:MW:PATH? Notes When "Presel Center" on page 1773 is performed, the instrument momentarily switches to the Standard Path, regardless of the setting of µW Path Control The DC Block will always be switched in when the low noise path is switched in, to protect succeeding circuitry from DC.
Page 366 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Annotation In the Meas Bar, if the Standard path is chosen: µW Path: Standard If Low Noise Path is enabled but the LNP switch is not thrown: µW Path: LNP,Off If the Low Noise Path is enabled and the LNP switch is thrown: µW Path: LNP,On If the preselector is bypassed: µW Path: Bypass...
Page 367 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Always Presel Bypass Always Presel Bypass Spurious Always Standard Path Emissions WLAN Mode Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Modulation Always Presel Bypass Analysis Spectral Flatness Always Presel Bypasss Power vs Time Always Presel Bypass Monitor Spectrum...
Page 368 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Emissions Transmit On|Off Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and Info BW > 15 MHz, in Power which case choose Preselector Bypass Channel Quality Mode Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Group Delay Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency >...
Page 369 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement whether or not the Low Noise Path Enable is selected in the user interface. The only time the Low Noise Path is used is when Low Noise Path Enable is selected, the sweep is completely in High Band (> 3.6 GHz) and no preamp is in use. For measurements that use IQ acquisition, the low noise path is used when Center Frequency is in High Band (>...
Page 370 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement There are other times where selecting the low noise path improves performance, too. Compression-limited measurements such as finding the nulls in a pulsed-RF spectrum can profit from the low noise path in a way similar to the TOI-limited measurement illustrated.
Page 371 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Option MPB or pre-selector bypass provides an unpreselected input mixer path for certain X-Series signal analyzers with frequency ranges above 3.6 GHz. This signal path allows a wider bandwidth and less amplitude variability, which is an advantage when doing modulation analysis and broadband signal analysis.
Page 372 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement whenever Full Bypass Enable is selected, a warning message appears in the status bar: “Full Bypass Enabled, maximum safe input power reduced” Microwave Preselector Bypass Backwards Compatibility Example Bypass the microwave preselector: :POW:MW:PRES OFF Notes Included for Microwave Preselector Bypass backwards compatibility parameter sets the...
Page 373 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Settings Alert message in the error queue Allow Full Bypass in Auto Enable or disable Full Bypass in µW Path Auto rule. See "µW Path Control" on page 1778. When this function is ON, and "µW Path Control"...
Page 374 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Software Preselection Provided in some instruments, either to compensate for issues with provided hardware preselection or to provide the preselection function when there is no hardware preselector. N9041B Software Preselection compensates for the frequency range limit of the microwave preselector.
Page 375 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement traces is used. This provides a method to reduce spurs that are internally generated within the VXT, but you should note the following when using Software Preselection: – There is some speed cost due to the need to take multiple captures –...
Page 376 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement – NORMal - mathematically removes all image and multiple responses of signals present at the input – ADVanced - any trace processing (such as “max hold” or trace averaging) is performed on the points of both candidate traces before the “select minimum” operation occurs.
Page 377 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement method Grayed-out when "Software Preselection" on page 1788 is OFF. The grayout message is “Unavailable unless SW Presel enabled” For N9042B+V3050A, the parameter is SCPI-only, and always set to NARRow when Software Preselection is enabled Preset NORMal N9041B...
Page 378 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Meas Mode Preset BASIC, WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA WCDMA WCDMA PCON WCDMA EVMQ WCDMA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA...
Page 379 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Res BW Activates the resolution bandwidth active function, which allows you to manually set the resolution bandwidth (RBW) of the instrument. Normally, Res BW (Auto) selects automatic coupling of the Res BW to "Span"...
Page 380 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement 1 Hz 8 MHz is the max equivalent –3 dB RBW, which means that the named RBW (the one shown on the control etc.) can exceed 8 MHz if using a filter other than –3 dB Gaussian Annotation A “#”...
Page 381 RBW Filter Type Selects the type for the resolution bandwidth filters. Historically, the Res BW filters in HP/Agilent/Keysight spectrum analyzers were Gaussian filters, specified using the –3 dB bandwidth of the filter. That is, a 10 MHz Res BW filter was a Gaussian shape with its –3 dB points 10 MHz apart.
Page 382 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Filter Type SCPI Gaussian GAUSsian Flattop FLATtop [:SENSe]:OBWidth:BANDwidth:SHAPe GAUSsian | FLATtop Remote Command [:SENSe]:OBWidth:BANDwidth:SHAPe? :OBW:BAND:SHAP GAUS Example :OBW:BAND:SHAP? Preset "Auto Couple" on page 1833 selects the preset value State Saved Saved in instrument state Annotation The annotation under RBW in the bottom left of the screen shows the type of filter or bandwidth that is being used.
Page 383 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement :DISP:OBW:WIND:XDB 1 Example :DISP:OBW:WIND:XDB? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state OFF|ON Range :DISPlay:OBWidth:VIEW:WINDow[1]:XDB Backwards Compatibility SCPI Boundary Frequency Selects frequency display type: – OFFSet: offsets from Center Freq to OBW boundary frequency are displayed –...
Page 384 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Notes The graticule is the set of horizontal and vertical lines that make up the grid/divisions for the X-Axis and Y-Axis Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Backwards Compatibility :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe]?
Page 385 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement :DISPlay:ANNotation:TRACe[:STATe]? :DISP:ANN:TRAC OFF Example Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Control Annotation Turns on and off the display of values on the Active Function controls for all measurements in the current Mode. This is a security feature. :DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe]?
Page 386 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement 1. To increase speed as much as possible by freeing the instrument from having to update the display 2. To reduce emissions from the display, drive circuitry 3. For security purposes If you have turned off the display: –...
Page 387 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Set by :SYST:DEF MISC, but not affected by *RST :SYSTem:PRESet State Saved Not saved in instrument state Backwards :SYST:PRES no longer turns on :DISPlay:ENABle as it did in legacy analyzers Compatibility Notes 3.3.5.3 View Contains controls for selecting the current View, and for editing User Views.
Page 388 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Backwards The legacy node Compatibility :DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] SCPI is retained for backwards compatibility, but it only supports predefined views Restore Layout to Default Restores the Layout to the default for Basic. Modified Views are very temporary; if you exit the current measurement they are discarded, and they are not saved in State.
Page 389 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Rename User View You can rename the current View by giving it a new unique name. Only User Views can be renamed, if the current View is a Predefined View, an error occurs. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:REName <alphanumeric>...
Page 390 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement :DISP:VIEW:ADV:DEL:ALL Example Notes Disabled if there are no User Views View Editor Remote Commands The following remote commands help you manage Views and User Views. Note that the SCPI node for User Views handles both Predefined and User Views. The legacy nodes, :DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] and :DISPlay:VIEW:NSEL, are retained for...
Page 391 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement 3.3.6 Frequency Opens the Frequency menu, which contains controls that allow you to control the Frequency and Channel parameters of the instrument. Some features in the Frequency menu are the same for all measurements in the current Mode –...
Page 392 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Frequency changes to the value for that input. SCPI commands are available to directly set Center Frequency for a specific input (see "RF Center Frequency" on page 395 "Ext Mix Center Freq" on page 396).
Page 393 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Note that, since out-of-range Start Freq and Stop Freq are never allowed, markers and trace math work correctly without requiring any special handling for out-of-range conditions Preset Depends on instrument maximum frequency, mode, measurement, and selected input "Center Frequency Presets"...
Page 394 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Freq Option CF after Mode Stop Freq after Mode Max Freq (can't tune Preset Preset above) 504 (M9421A, M8920A) 2.145 GHz 3.88GHz 3.88 GHz 506 (M9421A, M8920A) 3.245 GHz 6.08GHz 6.08 GHz F06 (M9410A/11A) 1.0 GHz 6.08 GHz...
Page 395 Source Numerator, Source Denominator, and Power Sweep Preset "Center Frequency Presets" on page 393 State Saved Saved in instrument state Instrument Types Value VXT model M9421A 55.000005 MHz VXT models M9410A/11A 6.505 kHz with Option 330.000005 MHz without Option LFE 330.000005 MHz VXT model M9415A 330.000005 MHz...
Page 396 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Instrument Types Value Unless Source Mode is set to Tracking, in which case it is limited by the minimum frequency of the Source See table above. Basically, instrument maximum frequency – 5 Hz. Note that, if the Source Mode is set to Tracking, the effective instrument maximum frequency may be limited by the source maximum frequency If the knob or step keys are being used, also depends on the value of the other three interdependent...
Page 397 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement State Saved The minimum frequency in the currently selected mixer band + 5 Hz The maximum frequency in the currently selected mixer band - 5 Hz If the knob or step keys are being used, also depends on the value of the other three interdependent parameters Span, Start Freq and Stop Freq Span Set the frequency of the occupied bandwidth span for the current measurement.
Page 398 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Mode Value State Saved 100 Hz Hardware Maximum Span [:SENSe]:EBWidth:FREQuency:SPAN Backwards Compatibility SCPI CF Step Changes the step size for the center frequency and start and stop frequency functions. Once a step size has been selected, and the center frequency function is active, the step keys (and the UP|DOWN parameters for Center Frequency from...
Page 399 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state – /+(the maximum frequency of the instrument). That is, 27 GHz max freq instrument has a CF step range of +/- 27 GHz. Note that this is the maximum frequency given the current settings of the instrument, so in External Mixing, for example, it is the maximum frequency of the current mixer band Status Bits/OPC non-overlapped...
Page 400 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Preset Marker 1 State Saved The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state Annunciation Appears in the marker results block label for Normal and Delta markers 3.3.7.2 Settings The controls on this tab include the Marker active function and a radio button selection for the marker control mode (Normal/POSition, Delta or Off;...
Page 401 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement :CALCulate:OBWidth:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:X:POSition? Command :CALC:OBW:MARK10:X:POS 0 Example :CALC:OBW:MARK10:X:POS? Notes The query returns the marker’s absolute X-Axis value in trace points if the control mode is Normal, or the offset from the marker’s reference marker in trace points if the control mode is Delta. The value is returned as a real number, not an integer, corresponding to the translation from X-Axis Scale units to trace points .
Page 402 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement :CALCulate:OBWidth:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:MODE POSition | DELTa | OFF Remote Command :CALCulate:OBWidth:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:MODE? :CALC:OBW:MARK:MODE POS Example :CALC:OBW:MARK:MODE? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state POSition|DELTa|OFF Range Annotation Mkr # <X value> and <Marker value> upper right on graph When Marker Trace is Polar in WCDMA mode: Mkr # <Chip Value (RHO &...
Page 403 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement :CALCulate:OBWidth:MARKer:AOFF Remote Command :CALC:OBW:MARK:AOFF Example 3.3.7.3 Peak Search The controls on this tab allow you to move the marker to selected peaks of the signal, giving you enormous analysis capabilities, particularly when combined with "Marker Delta"...
Page 404 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Marker Delta Pressing this button has the same effect as pressing Delta in "Marker Mode" on page 401 on the Settings tab. The selected marker becomes a Delta marker. If the selected marker is already a Delta marker, the reference marker is moved to the current position of the selected marker, thus resetting the delta to zero.
Page 405 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement If the reference marker is Off, it is turned on in Normal mode at the Delta marker location Preset The preset default “Relative To” marker (reference marker) is the next higher numbered marker (current marker +1).
Page 406 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement 3.3.8 Meas Setup Contains functions for setting up the measurement parameters and contains functions for setting up parameters global to all measurements in the mode. 3.3.8.1 Settings Contains frequently used Meas Setup functions to which you will want the fastest access.
Page 407 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement [:SENSe]:OBWidth:AVERage[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:OBWidth:AVERage[:STATe]? :OBW:AVER ON Example :OBW:AVER? Couplings Averaging state is coupled to "Max Hold (Remote Command Only)" on page 412. If Max Hold is changed from to ON, Averaging state is automatically set to Preset...
Page 408 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement :OBW:PERC? Preset 99.00 State Saved Min/Max 10/99.99 Power Ref Lets you select Power Ref type: TPOWer Total Power Total power in the current span is displayed OBWPower OBW Power Occupied power is displayed When Power Ref type is changed, the annotation in the lower window and Remote Command SCPI Results also change.
Page 409 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Power Integration Method Selects the power integration method: NORMal Normal By integrating the linear power bucket values from the lower edge of the trace, and interpolating to find the point where the integrated power equals (1 –...
Page 410 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Note that when Spur Avoidance is not in effect, either because you have disabled it or because you are not in multiple capture, the following warning message will appear in the status bar: Settings Alert;Spur Avoidance Off This is to alert you that measurement accuracy might be impacted by the fact that Spur Avoidance is not in effect.
Page 411 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement :COUPle ALL Remote Command :COUP ALL Example :COUPLE ALL | NONE Backwards Compatibility SCPI Backwards :COUP:NONE puts all Auto/Man parameters in manual mode, decoupling all the coupled instrument Compatibility parameters. It is retained for backwards compatibility and is not recommended for making Notes measurements or new designs All Auto/Man parameter couplings in the measurement are set to Auto.
Page 412 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement – Sweep Time – Video BANDwidth VBW/RBW ratio – Upper and Lower Tone (set to Sense) – Zero span measurement Resolution Bandwidth – Zero span measurement Dwell Time Harmonics (SA Mode only) Parameters affected by Auto Couple are: –...
Page 413 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement State Saved OFF|ON Range [:SENSe]:EBWidth:MAXHold Backwards Compatibility SCPI 3.3.8.2 Limits Lets you set measurement limits and be alerted when they have been exceeded. Limit Enables you to turn on or off limit checking at the specified frequency. For results that fail the limit test, a red FAIL appears in the Meas Bar.
Page 414 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Mode Value 1 MHz 25 kHz Mode Value All others State Saved OFF|ON Range Min/Max 1 kHz/Depends on instrument maximum frequency 3.3.8.3 Radio Contains controls to select Radio Standard and settings. Radio Std In this menu, 7 groups of WLAN standards can be selected: 1.
Page 415 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement ACT80 | AC160 | AH1 | AH2 | AH4 | AH8 | AH16 | JP10 | P5 | AF6 | AF7 | AF8 | Command AX20 | AX40 | AX80 | AXT80 | AX160 | BE20 | BE40 | BE80 | BE160 | BE320 [:SENSe]:RADio:STANdard[:WLAN]? :RAD:STAN AG Example...
Page 416 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Mode Measurements Supports Adaptive NFE? EDGEGSM EORF, ETSP, MON APD, DAN, FSC, MON, RTSC, SCH LTEAFDD LTEATDD ACP, CHP, MON, OBW, SEM, SPUR NR5G PNOISE LPL, MON, SFR SRCOMMS ACP, CHP, MON, OBW, SEM, SPUR ACP, CHP, OBW, SEM, SPUR WCDMA ACP, CHP, MON, OBW, SEM, SPUR...
Page 417 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement In those cases where the cancellation is ineffective, it nonetheless has no undesirable side-effects. There is no significant speed impact to having Noise Floor Extension on. The best accuracy is achieved when substantial smoothing occurs in each point before trace averaging.
Page 418 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement NFE On/Off Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:NOISe:FLOor ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:NOISe:FLOor? :CORR:NOIS:FLO ON Example Dependencies Only appears in instruments with the NFE or NF2 license installed. In all others, the control does not appear.
Page 419 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Optimal Detector & Averaging Selections Note that some measurements do not allow you to switch the Detector type (which is set by default to Average), so the discussion of detector types here is irrelevant for those measurements.
Page 420 Recalibration of Noise Floor In instruments with the NF2 license installed, the calibrated noise floor used by Noise Floor Extension should be refreshed periodically. Keysight recommends that the Characterize Noise Floor operation be performed after the first 500 hours of operation, and once every calendar year. To do this, use "Characterize Noise Floor"...
Page 421 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement This setting affects sensitivity and IF overloads. It only applies to the RF input; not to the baseband I/Q input. [:SENSe]:OBWidth:IF:GAIN[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:OBWidth:IF:GAIN[:STATe]? [:SENSe]:OBWidth:IF:GAIN:AUTO[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:OBWidth:IF:GAIN:AUTO[:STATe]? :OBW:IF:GAIN ON Example...
Page 422 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement When Global Center Freq is switched ON, the current Mode’s center frequency is copied into the Global Center Frequency, and from then on all Modes that support global settings use the Global Center Frequency, so you can switch between any of these Modes and the Center Frequency remains unchanged.
Page 423 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement :INSTrument:COUPle:EMC:STANdard ALL | NONE Remote Command :INSTrument:COUPle:EMC:STANdard? :INST:COUP:EMC:STAN ALL Example :INST:COUP:EMC:STAN? Dependencies Only available if Option EMC is installed Preset Set to on Global Settings, Restore Defaults and System, Restore Defaults, All Modes ALL | NONE Range Restore Defaults...
Page 424 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement You can select a shorter sweep time to improve the measurement throughput (with some potential unspecified accuracy reduction), but the Meas Uncal indicator will appear if the sweep time you set is less than the calculated Auto Sweep time. You can also select a longer sweep time, which can be useful (for example) for obtaining accurate insertion loss measurements on very narrowband filters.
Page 425 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement changes when these parameters are changed When you manually set a value when in the Auto state, the state automatically changes to Man Preset Automatically Calculated unless noted below WCDMA Mode – Channel Power: 1.0 msOBW: 32.6 ms –...
Page 426 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement When in Auto, this parameter’s value is determined by other parameters, such as Span, RBW and VBW. You can manually increase this parameter value from this Auto value. If increased, the instrument acquires signal for the specified time duration for each chunk.
Page 427 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement "More Information" on page 427 :INITiate:CONTinuous OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :INITiate:CONTinuous? Example Put instrument into Single measurement operation: :INIT:CONT 0 :INIT:CONT OFF Put instrument into Continuous measurement operation: :INIT:CONT 1 :INIT:CONT ON Preset...
Page 428 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement If the instrument is in Single measurement mode, pressing the Cont/Single toggle control does not zero the count and does not cause the sweep to be reset; the only action is to put the instrument into Continuous measurement operation. If the instrument is already in Continuous sweep: –...
Page 429 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement :INITiate[:IMMediate] Remote Command :INITiate:RESTart :INIT:IMM Example :INIT:REST Notes :INIT:REST :INIT:IMM perform exactly the same function Couplings Resets average/hold count k. For the first sweep overwrites all active (update = on) traces with new current data.
Page 430 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement If there is no Average or Max/Min Hold function (no trace in Trace Average or Hold, or Average/Hold Num set to 1), and no Waterfall window is being displayed, a single sweep is equivalent to a single measurement. A single sweep is taken after the trigger condition is met;...
Page 431 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Averaging The weighting factor used for averaging is k. This is also the average/hold count for how many valid sweeps (data acquisitions) have been done. This is used for comparisons with N, as those comparisons always needs to be based on valid completed sweeps.
Page 432 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Notes :INIT:CONT is ON, then a new continuous measurement will start immediately, with sweep (data acquisition) occurring once the trigger condition has been met :INIT:CONT is OFF, then :INIT:IMM is used to start a single measurement, with sweep (data acquisition) occurring once the trigger condition has been met :ABORt Dependencies...
Page 433 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Setting Auto Sweep Time to Accy results in slower sweep times, usually about three times as long, but yields better amplitude accuracy for CW signals. The instrument amplitude accuracy specifications only apply when Auto Sweep Time is set to Accy. Additional amplitude errors which occur when Auto Sweep Time is set to Norm are usually well under 0.1 dB, though this is not guaranteed.
Page 434 IF Dithering Lets you turn IF Dithering on or off. This is a technique used in unpreselected instruments (such as Keysight’s modular instruments) to enhance the rejection of images and internally-generated spurious signals. [:SENSe]:SWEep:IF:DITHer OFF | ON | 0 | 1...
Page 435 Image Protection Lets you turn IF Protection on or off. This is a technique used in unpreselected instruments (such as Keysight’s modular instruments) to detect and suppress images and spurs that may be present in non-preselected hardware. IF Protection takes two sweeps and by correlating the data between them, provides a single, correct power-versus-frequency trace.
Page 436 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Invalid Data Indicator The Invalid Data Indicator is displayed whenever the data on the display does not match the settings of the instrument. The most common example of this is when instrument settings have changed in the time since the data in the traces on the display was taken.
Page 437 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement If you now tap or click on one of the items in this menu, the instrument will perform the corresponding function. Peak Search finds the highest peak on the selected Trace. Clear/Write, Trace Average, Max Hold and Min Hold set the "Trace Type"...
Page 438 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement In this menu, Peak Search works as above. Peak Search all Traces finds the highest peak in the Waterfall window. Add Marker Here takes the lowest numbered Marker that is currently Off and turns it On as a Normal marker in the Waterfall window at the point where you right-clicked (or touched-and-held).
Page 439 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Top Line On the top line, each trace number is shown, in the trace color. A box is drawn around the currently selected trace. Middle Line Below each trace number, is a letter signifying the trace type for that trace number, where Clear/Write Trace Average...
Page 440 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement – Trace 1: Visible, being updated, in Clear/Write, with Normal detector auto selected – Trace 2: Visible, being updated, in Clear/Write, being written to with a math function – Trace 3: Visible, not updating, data was taken in Max Hold, with the peak detector auto selected –...
Page 441 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement 3.3.10.1 Select Trace Specifies the selected trace, which is the trace that will be affected when you change trace settings. Select Trace appears above the menu panel, indicating that it applies to all controls in the menu panel.
Page 442 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Trace Type There are four trace Types: Option Parameter SCPI Example Details WRITe :TRAC2:TYPE WRIT Clear/Write See: "Clear/Write" on page 445 AVERage :TRAC2:TYPE AVER Trace Average See: "Trace Average" on page 445 MAXHold :TRAC3:TYPE MAXH Maximum Hold See:...
Page 443 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Trace Mode Backwards Compatibility Commands In earlier instruments, the “Trace Modes” were: Clear/Write, Max Hold, Min Hold, View and Blank. Averaging was global to all traces and was controlled under the BW/Avg menu. In X-Series, trace averaging can be done on a per-trace basis.
Page 444 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement – :TRACe:MODE MINHold sets :TRACe:TYPE MINHold (Min Hold). It also sets :TRACe:UPDate :TRACe:DISPlay ON, for the selected trace – :TRACe:MODE VIEW sets :TRACe:UPDate OFF, :TRACe:DISPlay ON, for the selected trace – :TRACe:MODE BLANk sets :TRACe:UPDate OFF,...
Page 445 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Trace Type Details Clear/Write Each trace update replaces the old data in the trace with new data. Pressing Clear/Write for the selected trace, or sending :TRAC:TYPE WRIT for the specified trace, sets the trace type to Clear/Write and clears the trace, even if you are already in Clear/Write.
Page 446 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement – Once the new sweep starts, the trace is overwritten with current trace data as the first trace of the new average Remember that restarting averaging also restarts Max Hold and Min Hold, as there is only one count for Trace Average and Hold.
Page 447 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement – The average/hold count k is set to 1, so that the next time the min hold trace is displayed it simply represents one trace of new data – A new sweep is initiated Remember that restarting Min Hold also restarts Max Hold and averaging, because there is only one count for Trace Average and Hold.
Page 448 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement See: "More Information" on page 449 Notes For the commands to control the two variables, Update and Display, see "Trace Update State On/Off" on page 448 "Trace Display State On/Off" on page 448 below Dependencies When Signal ID is on, this key is grayed-out...
Page 449 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement :TRACe[1]|2|3:<meas>:DISPlay[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 :TRACe[1]|2|3:<meas>:DISPlay[:STATe]? where <meas> is the identifier for the current measurement Example Make trace 1 visible: :TRAC2:DISP 1 Blank trace 3: :TRAC3:DISP 3 Couplings Whenever you set Update to for any trace, the Display is set to for that trace Preset...
Page 450 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Note that putting a trace into Display=OFF and/or Update=OFF does not restart the sweep and does not restart Averaging or Hold functions for any traces. 3.3.10.3 Math Lets you turn on and configure Trace Math functions. Math Function Trace Math functions perform mathematical operations between traces and, in some cases, user-specified offsets.
Page 451 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Sets Trace 3 to Log Offset trace math function, sets the First Trace operand (for Trace 3) to Trace 1, leaves the Second Trace operand (for Trace 3) unchanged (it is irrelevant for this function) and sets the Log Offset (for Trace 3) to -6 dB :CALC:MATH TRACE3,LDIF,TRACE1,TRACE2,0,-6.00 Sets Trace 3 to Log Diff trace math function, sets the First Trace operand (for Trace 3) to Trace 1, sets...
Page 452 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement and the function is annotated on the trace if Trace Annotation is on *OPC Status Bits/OPC can be used to detect the completion of a sweep, which will also correspond to the completion dependencies of the math operation, since all math takes place during the sweep Trace Math Options...
Page 453 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Power Sum (Op1 + Op2) Calculates a power sum between the First Trace operand and the Second Trace operand and puts the result in the destination trace. During the sweep, the following formula is executed for each point in the trace operands, and the corresponding point is generated for the destination trace.
Page 454 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement B+DL function in some older instruments. The Reference is entered on the Reference control, which only appears when this math function is in force for the selected trace. Each destination trace has its own reference. During the sweep, the following formula is executed for each point in the trace operands, and the corresponding point is generated for the destination trace.
Page 455 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement For each active trace, the current trace point is processed for Trace 1, then Trace 2, then Trace 3, etc. Trace data is taken from either the detector for that trace, or WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 456 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement from the mathematical result of up to two other traces and an offset, depending on whether trace math is on or not. The resultant data is then fed to the Average/Hold processing block, where (if the trace type is Average, Max Hold, or Min Hold) it is processed with previous trace data.
Page 457 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement 5; for Trace 6, it presets to Trace 4 Operand 2: Trace number minus 1 (wraps at 1). For example, for Trace 1, Operand 2 presets to Trace 6; for Trace 6, it presets to Trace 5 State Saved Operands 1 and 2 for each trace are stored in instrument state Offset...
Page 458 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Option Behavior and the trace averaging function For details, see "Detector Select Auto/Man" on page 459 NORMal The detector determines the peak of the CW-like signals, and it yields alternating maximums and minimums of noise-like signals. This is also referred to as Rosenfell detection AVERage The detector determines the average of the signal within the sweep points, using...
Page 459 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Trace Type Query Returns: WRITe NORMal AVERage AVERage MAXHold POSitive MINHold NEGative AVERage Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state NORMal|AVERage|POSitive|SAMPle|NEGative|RMS Range Detector Select Auto/Man Sets the Detector mode to Auto (ON) or Man (OFF). In Auto, the proper detector is chosen based on rules that take into account the measurement settings and other instrument settings.
Page 460 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement From Trace Selects the trace to be copied to or exchanged with the "To Trace" on page 823 when a "Copy" on page 823 "Exchange" on page 824 is performed Preset To Trace Selects the trace to be copied from or exchanged with the "From Trace"...
Page 461 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement Exchange Executes a Trace Exchange based on the "From Trace" on page 823 "To Trace" on page 823 parameters. The From Trace and To Trace values are exchanged with each other. The action is performed once. The X-Axis settings and domain of a trace are also copied when it is exchanged with another trace.
Page 462 3 WLAN Mode 3.3 Occupied BW Measurement 3.3.10.6 Advanced Contains controls for setting advanced trace functions of the instrument. Measure Trace Specifies which trace’s scalar results are displayed in the Metrics window, and retrieved by sending a :READ :FETCh query: –...
Page 463 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement 3.4 SEM Measurement The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement analyzes spurious signal levels in up to six pairs of offset frequencies and relates them to the carrier power. SEM Measurement Commands The following commands and queries can be used to configure the measurement, then retrieve measurement results: The general functionality of "CONFigure"...
Page 464 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Results Displayed frequency domain relative limit trace data "Results for n = 2-4" on page 468 Offset abs power, Offset abs PSD, Offset abs peak power depending on "Measurement Type" on page 632 (Offset A- L) "Results for n = 5"...
Page 465 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Results Offset pass/fail (Offset A- L) Available only in LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, and 5GNR Modes 3.4.1 Results for n = 1 For WLAN Mode, these results apply to all standards except 802.11ac/ax (80+80MHz). Returns 82 comma-separated scalar results, in the following order: k is an index for each offset: k = 0 for offset A;...
Page 466 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Item Unit, if any 10k + 17, Returns -999.0 when "Measurement Type" on page 632 PSD Ref: dBm/Hz k = 0 Spectrum Peak Ref Others: dBm Relative peak power on the positive offset A When "Measurement Type"...
Page 467 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Item Unit Absolute reference power When "Measurement Type" on page 632 PSD: dBm/Hz Others: dBm Absolute power of the carrier of which the frequency is When "Measurement Type" on page 632 indicated by Freq Segment 1 Total Power Ref: dBm Returns -999.0 when Meas Type is Spectrum Peak Ref When PSD Ref: dBm/Hz...
Page 468 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Item Unit Peak power offset frequency from the center or carrier edge frequency in the positive offset F 10k + 20, k = 5 Depends on the setting of "Offset Freq Define" on page 574 Minimum margin from limit line on the negative offset A 2k + 71, k Minimum margin from limit line on the positive offset A...
Page 469 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Item Unit (*2) Power at positive offset N 2k + 4, k = 13 *1: Ref carrier power when "Measurement Type" on page 632 is Total Power Ref or PSD Ref; Spectrum peak power when "Measurement Type"...
Page 470 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement The number of values returned is subject to change in future releases 3.4.6 Results for n = 7-11 Data Returns 30 comma-separated pass/fail test results (0 = passed, or 1 = failed) determined by testing the minimum margin point from the limit line that is determined each offset's Limits setting Item Reserved for future use, returns -999.0...
Page 471 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Data Item At negative offset A 2k + 3, k = 0 At positive offset A 2k + 4, k = 0 At positive offset N 2k + 4, k = 13 If the result is not available, -999.0 is returned The number of values returned is subject to change in future releases Returns 30 comma-separated scalar values (in dBm) of the absolute peak power of the segment frequencies Item...
Page 472 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Data If the result is not available, -999.0 is returned The number of values returned is subject to change in future releases 3.4.7 Results for n = 12 When "Measurement Type" on page 632 is Spectrum Peak reference, returns the peak power of the signal in the ref channel Otherwise, the value returned is -999.0...
Page 473 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Item Unit Others: dB Absolute peak power on the positive offset A When "Measurement Type" on page 632 PSD Ref: dBm/Hz 10k + 9, k Others: dBm Peak power offset frequency from the center or carrier edge frequency in the positive offset A 10k + 10, k = 0...
Page 474 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement 3.4.10 Results for n = 16 If the result is not available, (9.91E+37) is returned Returns two carriers’ comma-separated scalar results when the radio standard is 802.11ac 80+80 MHz. Returns otherwise 1. Absolute power of carrier segment 1 (dBm) 2.
Page 475 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement View Name Enumerated ID Numeric ID Details APFReq "Abs Pwr Freq" Displays the absolute power levels in dBm on page 476 and the corresponding frequencies in the text window RPFReq "Rel Pwr Freq" Displays the relative power levels in dBc on page 476 and the corresponding frequencies in the text window...
Page 476 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement 3.4.13.1 Abs Pwr Freq Displays the absolute power levels in dBm and the corresponding frequencies in the text window. Windows: "Graph" on page 476, "Table" on page 481 :DISP:SEM:VIEW APFR Example 3.4.13.2 Rel Pwr Freq Displays the relative power levels in dBc and the corresponding frequencies in the text window.
Page 477 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement View Size Position Abs Pwr Freq Three fifth, full width Rel Pwr Freq Three fifth, full width Integrated Power Three fifth, full width Gate View One third, full width Middle The Graph differs depending on which View you are in. The views differ depending on the setting of the measurement type ("Measurement Type"...
Page 478 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Graph Window in Rel Pwr Freq View Corresponding Trace yellow - Combined trace from carrier and each offset Rel Peak Pwr & Freq (Total Pwr Ref) Rel Peak Pwr & Freq (PSD Ref) Rel Peak Pwr & Freq (Spectrum Pk Ref) WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 479 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Graph Window in Integrated Power View Corresponding Trace yellow - Combined trace from carrier and each offset Integrated Power (Total Pwr Ref) Integrated Power (PSD Ref) Integrated Power (Spectrum Pk Ref) WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 480 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Graph Window in Carrier Info View Sets the display to the carrier info view. The views differ depending on the setting of "Measurement Type" on page 632. Spectrum trace (Total Pwr Ref) Spectrum trace (PSD Ref) WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 481 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Spectrum trace (Spectrum Pk Ref) 3.4.14.2 Table Displays textual results for the measurement. The Table differs depending on which View you are in. The views differ depending on the setting of "Measurement Type" on page 632.
Page 482 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Table Window in Abs Pwr Freq View Name (Measurement Unit, if any Corresponding Results Type) Power n = 1 2nd element Absolute power at the reference area Reference In multi-carrier applications, this column displays which carrier is reference carrier PSD Ref (PSD Ref) n = 5 1st element...
Page 483 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement MSR, LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR When Measurement Type is PSD Ref: Modes other than MSR, LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR MSR, LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 484 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement When Measurement Type is Spectrum Pk Ref: Modes other than MSR, LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR MSR, LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR Table Window in Rel Pwr Freq View Name (Measurement Unit, if any Corresponding Results Type) Power...
Page 485 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Name (Measurement Unit, if any Corresponding Results Type) Stop Freq Stop frequency for offset Integ BW Measurement bandwidth for offset Lower Peak (Total Pwr dBc (Total Pwr Relative peak power on minimum margin point of the Ref, Spectrum Pk Ref) Ref) negative offset...
Page 486 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement When Measurement Type is PSD Ref: Modes other than MSR, LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR MSR, LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR When Measurement Type is Spectrum Pk Ref: Modes other than MSR, LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 487 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement MSR, LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR Table Window in Integrated Power View Name Unit, if any Corresponding Results (Measurement Type) Power n = 1 2nd element Absolute power at the reference area Reference In multi-carrier applications, this column displays which carrier is reference carrier PSD Ref n = 5 1st element...
Page 488 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Name Unit, if any Corresponding Results (Measurement Type) Lower Δ Lim Minimum margin from limit line which is decided by Fail Mask setting on the negative offset Lower Integ (Total Absolute integrated power on the negative offset Power Ref) Lower (PSD Ref) dBm/Hz...
Page 489 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement When Measurement Type is PSD Ref: Modes other than MSR, LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR MSR, LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR When Measurement Type is Spectrum Pk Ref: Modes other than MSR, LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 490 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement MSR, LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR Table Window in Carrier Info View Only available in MSR, LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR Modes. Carrier center frequency can be displayed in either offset or absolute frequency depending on Carrier Freq.
Page 491 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Name Unit, if Corresponding Results determines whether the relative frequency or absolute frequency will be displayed Sub-block Displays which sub-block the carrier belongs to in the intra-band non-contiguous aggregation mode. The column will be displayed when Carrier Allocation is Non-contiguous Measure Indicates whether the carrier power is present or not...
Page 492 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement 3.4.15 Amplitude Activates the Amplitude menu and selects Reference Level or Reference Value as the active function, depending on the measurement. Some features in this menu apply to multiple measurements. Some other features apply only to specific measurements and their controls are blanked or grayed-out in measurements that do not support the feature.
Page 493 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Scale/Div also determines the displayed amplitude range in the log plot graph. Since there are usually 10 vertical graticule division on the display, the total amplitude range of the graph is typically 10x this amount. For example, if Scale/Div is 10 dB, then the total range of the graph is 100 dB.
Page 494 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Ref Position Positions the reference level at the top, center, or bottom of the Y Scale display. Changing the reference position does not change "Ref Value" on page 492. :DISPlay:SEMask:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition TOP | CENTer | BOTTom Remote Command :DISPlay:SEMask:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition?
Page 495 Meas Preset. Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are disabled, as the expected input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control.
Page 496 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Note that Configuration 2 is not strictly speaking a dual-section attenuator, since there is no electronic section available. However, it behaves exactly like Configuration 1 without the Electronic Attenuator Option EA3, therefore for the sake of this document it is grouped into the “Dual-Attenuator”...
Page 497 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Full Range Atten This control and Attenuator Summary only appear in N9041B, when the RF input is selected, the RF Input Port is set to RF Input 2, and the Full Range Attenuator is installed. The Full Range Attenuator adds a second input attenuator in front of RF Input 2, which enhances the protection and optimizes the performance of the extra internal mixers used by RF Input 2.
Page 498 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Mech Atten Labeled Mech Atten in Dual-Attenuator models, and Atten in Single-Attenuator models. In the Dual-Attenuator configuration, this control only affects the mechanical attenuator. Lets you modify the attenuation applied to the RF input signal path. This value is normally auto-coupled to Ref Level, "Internal Preamp"...
Page 499 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement 7.5 GHz to above 7.5 GHz, the attenuation setting changes to a multiple of 10 dB that is no smaller than the previous setting. For example, 4 dB attenuation changes to 10 dB Preset Auto The Auto value is 10 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state 0 dB...
Page 500 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man As described under "Attenuation" on page 1750, there are two distinct attenuator configurations available in the X-Series, the Single Attenuator and Dual-Attenuator configurations. In Dual-Attenuator configurations, we have mechanical attenuation and electronic attenuation, and current total attenuation is the sum of electronic + mechanical attenuation.
Page 501 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement This control includes an Enable/Disable toggle switch; it is only possible to enter a value for the Electronic Attenuator when this switch is in the Enable position. For more details of the Electronic Attenuator, see "More Information"...
Page 502 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Transition Rules" on page 503 Preset 0 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state 0 dB Dual-Attenuator configuration: 24 dB Single-Attenuator configuration: the total of ATT and EATT cannot exceed 50 dB. So, if the EATT is set to 24 dB first, the main attenuation cannot be greater than 26 dB and will be reduced accordingly;...
Page 503 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Mechanical Attenuator Transition Rules When the Electronic Attenuator is enabled, the Mechanical Attenuator transitions to a state that has no Auto function. Below are the rules for transitioning the Mechanical Attenuator. Note that the information below only applies to the Dual- Attenuator configurations, and only when the Electronic Attenuator is installed: When the Electronic Attenuation is enabled from a disabled state: –...
Page 504 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Using the Electronic Attenuator: Pros and Cons The electronic attenuator offers finer steps than the mechanical attenuator, has no acoustical noise, is faster, and is less subject to wear. The “finer steps” advantage of the electronic attenuator is beneficial in optimizing the alignment of the instrument dynamic range to the signal power in the front panel as well as remote use.
Page 505 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement – Electric attenuator only – Combination of Electric attenuator and Mechanical attenuator when [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize IMMediate is executed. [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:TYPE EONLy | COMBined Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:TYPE? :POW:RANG:OPT:TYPE EONL Example :POW:RANG:OPT:TYPE? Dependencies Does not appear in the Swept SA, RTSA, Monitor Spectrum and Complex Spectrum measurements Appears in the Waveform measurement in BASIC and 5G NR Modes COMBined Preset...
Page 506 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Notes The parameter option ELECtrical sets this function to in Single-Attenuator models The parameter option COMBined is mapped to ELECtrical in Single-Attenuator models. If you send COMBined, it sets the function to and returns ELEC to a query For SCPI compatibility with models that do not have an input attenuator, the...
Page 507 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Single-Attenuator Models Dual-Attenuator models "Adjust Atten for Min Clipping" on page 1759 "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 505 selection is Mech + Elec Atten: WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 508 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 509 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 505 selection is Elec Only. Note that the Mech Atten value is not adjusted, and the value previously set is used. Therefore, there is a case that IF Overload is still observed depending on the input signal level and the Mech Atten setting.
Page 510 All other models: 2 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state 3.4.15.3 Range (Non-attenuator models) Only available for Keysight’s modular signal analyzers and certain other Keysight products, such as VXT and M941xE. State Saved Range Represents the amplitude of the largest sinusoidal signal that could be present within the IF without being clipped by the ADC.
Page 511 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Adjust Range for Min Clipping Sets the combination of attenuation and gain based on the current measured signal level so that clipping will be at a minimum. This is an "immediate action" function, that is, it executes once, when the key is pressed.
Page 512 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Peak-to-Average Ratio Used with "Range (Non-attenuator models)" on page 1769 to optimize the level control in the instrument. The value is the ratio, in dB, of the peak power to the average power of the signal to be measured. A ratio of 0 should be used for sinusoidal signals;...
Page 513 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Mixer Lvl Offset This is an advanced setting to adjust target Range at the input mixer, which in turn affects the signal level in the instrument’s IF. This setting can be used when additional optimization is needed after setting "Peak-to-Average Ratio"...
Page 514 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement between Start Freq and Stop Freq, the instrument first performs a peak search, and then performs centering on the marker’s center frequency. The value displayed on "Preselector Adjust" on page 1774 changes to reflect the new preselector tuning.
Page 515 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement search to find 2. If the selected marker is already On, the instrument attempts the centering at that marker’s frequency. There is no preselector for signals below about 3.6 GHz, so if the marker is on a signal below 3.6 GHz, no centering is attempted, and an advisory message is generated 3.
Page 516 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement State Saved The Preselector Adjust value set by "Presel Center" on page 1773, or by manually adjusting Preselector Adjust Not saved in instrument state, and does not survive a Preset or power cycle Min/Max –/+500 MHz [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PADJust Backwards...
Page 517 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement The maximum Center Frequency for Low Band, displayed in square brackets, NOTE can change based on the selected IFBW for measurements that support IFBW (for example, Waveform measurement across all Modes that support it). In certain models (such as N9042B &...
Page 518 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement LNA is an additional preamplifier that provides superior DANL and frequency range compared to "Internal Preamp" on page 1775. LNA provides lower system noise figure, especially at frequencies above 100 MHz, and can be operated up to the full range of 50 GHz instruments.
Page 519 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement µW Path Control Options for this control include µW Preselector Bypass (Option MPB), Low Noise Path (Option LNP) and Full Bypass Enable in the High Band path circuits. When the µW Preselector is bypassed, flatness is improved, but will be subject to spurs from out of band interfering signals.
Page 520 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH STD | LNPath | MPBypass | FULL Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH? :POW:MW:PATH LNP Example Enables the Low Noise path :POW:MW:PATH? Notes When "Presel Center" on page 1773 is performed, the instrument momentarily switches to the Standard Path, regardless of the setting of µW Path Control The DC Block will always be switched in when the low noise path is switched in, to protect succeeding circuitry from DC.
Page 521 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Annotation In the Meas Bar, if the Standard path is chosen: µW Path: Standard If Low Noise Path is enabled but the LNP switch is not thrown: µW Path: LNP,Off If the Low Noise Path is enabled and the LNP switch is thrown: µW Path: LNP,On If the preselector is bypassed: µW Path: Bypass...
Page 522 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Always Presel Bypass Always Presel Bypass Spurious Always Standard Path Emissions WLAN Mode Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Modulation Always Presel Bypass Analysis Spectral Flatness Always Presel Bypasss Power vs Time Always Presel Bypass Monitor Spectrum...
Page 523 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Emissions Transmit On|Off Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and Info BW > 15 MHz, in Power which case choose Preselector Bypass Channel Quality Mode Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Group Delay Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency >...
Page 524 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement whether or not the Low Noise Path Enable is selected in the user interface. The only time the Low Noise Path is used is when Low Noise Path Enable is selected, the sweep is completely in High Band (> 3.6 GHz) and no preamp is in use. For measurements that use IQ acquisition, the low noise path is used when Center Frequency is in High Band (>...
Page 525 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement There are other times where selecting the low noise path improves performance, too. Compression-limited measurements such as finding the nulls in a pulsed-RF spectrum can profit from the low noise path in a way similar to the TOI-limited measurement illustrated.
Page 526 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Option MPB or pre-selector bypass provides an unpreselected input mixer path for certain X-Series signal analyzers with frequency ranges above 3.6 GHz. This signal path allows a wider bandwidth and less amplitude variability, which is an advantage when doing modulation analysis and broadband signal analysis.
Page 527 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement whenever Full Bypass Enable is selected, a warning message appears in the status bar: “Full Bypass Enabled, maximum safe input power reduced” Microwave Preselector Bypass Backwards Compatibility Example Bypass the microwave preselector: :POW:MW:PRES OFF Notes Included for Microwave Preselector Bypass backwards compatibility STD)
Page 528 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Settings Alert message in the error queue Allow Full Bypass in Auto Enable or disable Full Bypass in µW Path Auto rule. See "µW Path Control" on page 1778. When this function is ON, and "µW Path Control"...
Page 529 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Software Preselection Provided in some instruments, either to compensate for issues with provided hardware preselection or to provide the preselection function when there is no hardware preselector. N9041B Software Preselection compensates for the frequency range limit of the microwave preselector.
Page 530 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement traces is used. This provides a method to reduce spurs that are internally generated within the VXT, but you should note the following when using Software Preselection: – There is some speed cost due to the need to take multiple captures –...
Page 531 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement – NORMal - mathematically removes all image and multiple responses of signals present at the input – ADVanced - any trace processing (such as “max hold” or trace averaging) is performed on the points of both candidate traces before the “select minimum” operation occurs.
Page 532 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement method Grayed-out when "Software Preselection" on page 1788 is OFF. The grayout message is “Unavailable unless SW Presel enabled” For N9042B+V3050A, the parameter is SCPI-only, and always set to NARRow when Software Preselection is enabled Preset NORMal N9041B...
Page 533 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Meas Mode Preset BASIC, WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA WCDMA WCDMA PCON WCDMA EVMQ WCDMA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA...
Page 534 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Option SCPI Behavior GAUSsian Gaussian The selected filter is applied to carriers and all offsets FLATtop Flattop ASENse Auto Sense The filter type is automatically selected for each carrier and offset in a way such that measurement speed and accuracy are optimized Filter Auto Sense Rules: –...
Page 535 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state ON|OFF Range 3.4.17.2 Annotation Contains controls for setting up the annotation for the current Mode or Measurement. Graticule Turns the display graticule On or Off for all windows with graticules in all measurements in the current Mode.
Page 536 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement :DISP:ANN:SCR OFF Example Dependencies Grayed-out and forced to when System Display Settings, Annotation is Preset This remains through a Preset when System Display Settings, Annotation is set to State Saved Saved in instrument state Trace Annotation Turns on and off the labels on the traces, showing their detector (or their Math Mode) as described in the Trace section, for all windows in all measurements in the...
Page 537 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Meas Bar Turns the Measurement Bar at the top of the screen on and off for all measurements in the current Mode. When OFF, the graticule area expands to fill the area formerly occupied by the Measurement Bar. :DISPlay:ANNotation:MBAR[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :DISPlay:ANNotation:MBAR[:STATe]?
Page 538 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Name Command :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:SELect Select User View :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:REName Rename User View :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:DELete Delete User View :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:NAME Create User View :INSTrument:SCReen:SELect Select Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:DELete Delete Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:DELete:ALL Delete All But This Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:CREate Add Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:REName Rename Screen :SYSTem:SEQuencer Sequencer On/Off...
Page 539 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement 3.4.18.1 Settings Contains controls that pertain to the X axis parameters of the measurement. These parameters control how data on the vertical (X) axis is displayed, and control instrument settings that affect the horizontal axis. Center Frequency Sets the frequency that corresponds to the horizontal center of the graticule.
Page 540 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement :FREQ:CENT? Notes Sets the RF, External Mixing or I/Q Center Frequency depending on the selected input: – For RF input, equivalent to :FREQ:RF:CENT – For I/Q input, equivalent to :FREQ:IQ:CENT – For External Mixer, equivalent to :FREQ:EMIX:CENT Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options If no terminator (for example.
Page 541 3.755 GHz 7.5 GHz 7.575 GHz F13 (CXA-m) 6.805 GHz 13.6 GHz 13.8 GHz F26 (CXA-m) 13.255 GHz 26.5 GHz 26.55 GHz 504 (M9421A, M8920A) 2.145 GHz 3.88GHz 3.88 GHz 506 (M9421A, M8920A) 3.245 GHz 6.08GHz 6.08 GHz F06 (M9410A/11A) 1.0 GHz 6.08 GHz 6.08 GHz...
Page 542 The following table shows the Center Frequency Presets and Range for VXT modes with Radio Heads/CIU. Products with Radio Heads/CIU Preset Start frequency Stop frequency M9421A + CIU 6 GHz 5.9 GHz 12 GHz M9410A + CIU 6 GHz 5.9 GHz...
Page 543 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Preset "Center Frequency Presets" on page 540 above State Saved Saved in instrument state -79.999995 MHz "Center Frequency Presets" on page 540 above. Basically, instrument maximum frequency - 5 Hz If the knob or step keys are being used, also depends on Span Ext Mix Center Freq Sets the center frequency to use when the External Mixer is selected, even if the External Mixer input is not the selected input at the time the command is sent.
Page 544 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement I/Q Center Freq Sets the center frequency to use when the I/Q input is selected, even if the I/Q input is not the selected input at the time the command is sent. Note that Center Frequency in the Frequency menu on the front panel always applies to the currently selected input.
Page 545 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement >3.6 GHz by pressing the Up-arrow key, fails and results in an advisory message. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “-221, Settings conflict” warning Couplings When auto-coupled, the center frequency step size is set to 10% of the span Preset...
Page 546 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Note that the SCPI command sets this center frequency even if Radio Standard is not 802.11ac/ax 80+80MHz. [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:SEGMent2 <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:SEGMent2? :FREQ:CENTer:SEGM2 5.53 GHz Example :FREQ:CENTer:SEGM2? Notes For an 80+80 MHz channel, Segment2 will be the lower or upper segment. The center frequency of Segment2 is independent from the center frequency of Segment1 The measurement rearranges Segment1 and Segment2 based on their center frequency, and generates a “setting conflict”...
Page 547 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement 3.4.19.2 Settings The controls on this tab include the Marker active function and a radio button selection of the marker control mode (Normal, Delta or Off) for the selected marker, as well as additional functions that help you use markers. Marker Frequency Sets the marker X-Axis value in the current marker X-Axis Scale unit.
Page 548 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement offset from the marker’s reference marker in trace points if the control mode is Delta. The value is returned as a real number, not an integer, corresponding to the translation from X-Axis Scale units to trace points .
Page 549 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state POSition|OFF Range Annotation Mkr# <X value> and <Marker value> upper right of graph All Markers Off Turns off all markers. :CALCulate:SEMask:MARKer:AOFF Remote Command :CALC:SEM:MARK:AOFF Example Couple Markers When this function is ON, moving any marker causes an equal X-Axis movement of every other marker that is not OFF.
Page 550 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Marker Trace Selects the trace on which you want your marker placed. A marker is associated with one and only one trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X-Axis Scale of the marker. All markers have an associated trace; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal markers.
Page 551 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement displayed at the end of each sweep. After the specified number of average counts, the average mode (termination control) setting determines the average action. In the remote mode, use "Averaging On/Off" on page 551 to turn Averaging on or off.
Page 552 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement :SEM:FILT ON Example :SEM:FILT? Dependencies WLAN: RRC Weight is not supported when the radio standard is WLAN 802.11ac (80+80MHz) Preset SA, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5G NR, WLAN, MSR Modes WCDMA Mode State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Integration BW|RRC Weighted RRC Filter Alpha...
Page 553 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Sweep Type Rules Selects which set of rules will be used for automatic selection of "Sweep Type" on page 578 when Sweep Type mode is Auto. Rule Option Description DRANge Best The instrument selects either swept or FFT analysis with the primary Dynamic goal of dynamic range optimization.
Page 554 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement If WLAN radio standard is changed, Limit State will be preset to When the value of Limit State is STD, and Radio Standard is 11ac 80+80 MHz, the channel span will be set to the value satisfying the equation below if its previous value is less than the value calculated through the equation Chan Span = spacing between the two carriers + Chan IntegBW Preset...
Page 555 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement [:SENSe]:SEMask:LIMits:STANdard IEEE | FCA | FCB | FCC | FCD | ESCH1 | ESCH2 Remote Command | ESCH4 [:SENSe]:SEMask:LIMits:STANdard? :SEM:LIM:STAN IEEE Example Dependencies Only available in WLAN Mode Grayed-out if Radio Standard is not 802.11a/g/j/p 20MHz, 802.11j/p 10MHz, 802.11p 5MHz The ETSI masks are grayed-out if Radio Standard is not 802.11j/p 10M IEEE Preset...
Page 556 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Before UE, the LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD standards gave the test specification requirements for BS intra-band contiguous aggregation and intra-band non- contiguous aggregation modes. However, for UE, only the requirements of intra- band contiguous aggregation modes are defined. So, the standards don’t support making the measurement in UE intra-band non-contiguous aggregation mode for LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD.
Page 557 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Offset (Bandwidth) Enables you to set up the bandwidth measurement parameters for offset pairs. For example, you can assign the start and stop frequencies, and select the resolution bandwidth. Offset Freq Define Enables you to select offset frequency definition. Each standard defines each offset frequency from Carrier.
Page 558 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Disabled. When Number of Component Carriers = 1, RF BW = BW = 2 x channel offset,RAT [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:TYPE CTOCenter | CTOEdge | ETOCenter | ETOEdge Remote Command [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:TYPE? :SEM:OFFS:TYPE ETOC Example :SEM:OFFS:TYPE? OFFSet1 Notes is for BTS, 2 for MS.
Page 559 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Disabled. When Number of Component Carriers = 1, RF BW = BW = 2 x channel offset,RAT [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:TYPE CTOCenter | CTOEdge | ETOCenter | Remote ETOEdge | RTOCenter | RTOEdge Command [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:TYPE? :SEM:OFFS:TYPE ETOC Example :SEM:OFFS:TYPE? OFFSet1...
Page 560 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Diagrams for Modes other than MSR, LTEAFDD/LTEATDD, 5G NR WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 561 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Diagrams for MSR, LTEAFDD/LTEATDD, 5G NR Offset Detector Enables you to control the detector for offsets. The following choices are available: AUTO The detector selected depends on marker functions, trace functions, average type, and the trace averaging function NORMal The detector determines the peak of the CW-like signals, and it yields alternating maximums and minimums of noise-like signals.
Page 562 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement averaging method depends upon the Average Type selection (voltage, power or log scales) POSitive The detector determines the maximum of the signal within the sweep points Peak SAMPle The detector indicates the instantaneous level of the signal at the center of the sweep points represented by each display point NEGative The detector determines the minimum of the signal within the sweep points...
Page 563 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Start Freq Specifies the start frequency for the currently selected offset. Also enables you to toggle that offset between On and Off. When sending the remote command, missing values are not permitted; that is, if you want to change values 2 and 6, you must send all values up to 6.
Page 564 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Mode Values LTEATDD MHz,40 MHz, 40 MHz, 40 MHz | 15.00 kHz,1.5 MHz, 5.5 MHz, 6.5 MHz, 10 MHz, 20MHz, 20MHz, 20MHz, 20MHz, 20MHz, 20MHz, 20MHz 5G NR 50 kHz, 5.05 MHz, 10.5 MHz, 40.00 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz | 15.00 kHz, 1.5 MHz, 5.5 MHz, 100.50 MHz, 105.00 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz...
Page 565 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Radio Std Presets 802.11b/g 11 MHz, 22 MHz, 50 MHz, 70 MHz, 90 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, (DSSS/CCK/PBCC) 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz 802.11n(20MHz) 9 MHz, 11 MHz, 20 MHz, 30 MHz, 40 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz 802.11n(40MHz)
Page 566 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Radio Std Presets 9 MHz, 9 MHz, 9 MHz, 9 MHz, 9 MHz 802.11af(7MHz) 3.325 MHz, 3.675 MHz, 7 MHz, 10.5 MHz, 10.5 MHz, 10.5 MHz, 10.5 MHz, 10.5 MHz, 10.5 MHz, 10.5 MHz, 10.5 MHz, 10.5 MHz, 10.5 MHz, 10.5 MHz 802.11af(8MHz) 3.8 MHz, 4.2 MHz, 8 MHz, 12 MHz, 12 MHz, 12 MHz, 12 MHz, 12 MHz, 12 MHz, 12 MHz, 12 MHz, 12 MHz, 12 MHz, 12 MHz...
Page 567 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Stop Freq Specifies the stop frequency for the currently selected offset. When sending the remote command, missing values are not permitted; that is, if you want to change values 2 and 6, you must send all values up to 6. Subsequent values will remain unchanged.
Page 568 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement the Offset F value WLAN Mode: See table of "WLAN Mode Presets" on page 568 below State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max 100 Hz/Depends on instrument maximum frequency. Same as the Max Span in Swept SA Measurement WLAN Mode Presets Radio Std Presets...
Page 569 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Radio Std Presets 802.11p (5MHz) 2.5MHz, 2.75MHz, 5 MHz, 7.5 MHz, 12.5MHz, 250MHz, 250MHz, 250MHz, 250 MHz, 250MHz, 250MHz, 250MHz, 250MHz, 250MHz 802.11ax/be (20MHz) 10.5 MHz, 20 MHz, 30 MHz, 40 MHz, 50 MHz, 50 MHz, 50 MHz, 50 MHz, 50 MHz, 50 MHz, 50 MHz, 50 MHz, 50 MHz, 50 MHz 802.11ax/be (40MHz) 20.5 MHz, 40 MHz, 60 MHz, 70 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100 MHz, 100...
Page 570 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO? :SEM:OFFS2:LIST:BAND 30.0 kHz, 30.0 kHz, 30.0 kHz, 1.00 MHz,1.00 MHz, 1.00 Example :SEM:OFFS2:LIST:BAND? :SEM:OFFS:LIST:BAND:AUTO 1,1,1,1,1,1 :SEM:OFFS:LIST:BAND:AUTO? Notes Comma separated list of values OFFSet1 is for BTS, 2 for MS. Default is BTS Note that Offset sub op code 2 is supported only in non-SA modes. In the SA mode, Offset sub op code 1 is used for both BTS and MS Couplings Coupled to Start and Stop offset and Meas BW multiplier.
Page 571 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF When the max number of offsets is 14: OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF | OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Saved in instrument state...
Page 572 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Preset When the max number of offsets is 6: Mode Values 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 WCDMA 1, 1, 1, 10, 1, 1|1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 When the max number of offsets is 12 in these modes, the preset value of Offset G ~ L is the same as the Offset F value Mode Values...
Page 573 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Notes Comma separated list of values OFFSet1 is for BTS, 2 for MS. Default is BTS Note that Offset sub op code 2 is supported only in non-SA modes. In the SA mode, Offset sub op code 1 is used for both BTS and MS Preset Automatically Calculated...
Page 574 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Note that Offset sub op code 2 is supported only in non-SA modes. In the SA mode, Offset sub op code 1 is used for both BTS and MS Preset Modes other than LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5G NR, MSR, WLAN: When the max number of offsets is 6: 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01|0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01 When the max number of offsets is 12, the preset value of Offset G ~ L is the same as the Offset F value...
Page 575 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Offset Detector Same as "Offset Detector" on page 561 under Offset (Bandwidth). Start Freq Same as "Start Freq" on page 563 under Offset (Bandwidth). Stop Freq Same as "Stop Freq" on page 567 under Offset (Bandwidth). Sweep Time Specifies the Sweep Time for the currently selected offset and enables you to toggle the Sweep Time mode between Auto and Man.
Page 576 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Notes Comma separated list of values OFFSet1 is for BTS, 2 for MS. Default is BTS Note that Offset sub op code 2 is supported only in non-SA modes. In the SA mode, Offset sub op code 1 is used for both BTS and MS Dependencies On non-sweeping hardware, this column is grayed out and the Auto/Man checkbox is invisible.
Page 577 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Therefore, the total signal acquisition time for the entire offset span is ~(>~Minimum Acquisition Time) * (The number of chunks). When in Auto, this parameter’s value is determined by other parameters, such as Offset Start, Offset Stop, RBW and VBW. You can manually increase this parameter value from this Auto value.
Page 578 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement :SEM:OFFS2:LIST:SWE:ETIM? Example Dependencies Available only on non-sweeping hardware Preset Automatically calculated Sweep Type Specifies the Sweep Type for the currently selected offset, and enables you to toggle the Sweep Type mode between Auto and Man. When sending the remote command, missing values are not permitted;...
Page 579 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Preset Automatically calculated LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5G NR, MSR Modes: ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON| ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON When the max number of offsets is 14: WLAN Mode: ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON All Other Modes: When the max number of offsets is 6: ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON When the max number of offsets is 12: ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON,ON State Saved...
Page 580 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:SIDE BOTH | NEGative | POSitive, … Remote Command [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:SIDE? :SEM:OFFS:LIST:SIDE BOTH, NEG, NEG, POS, POS, POS Example :SEM:OFFS:LIST:SIDE? Notes Comma-separated list of values OFFSet1 is for BTS, 2 for MS. Default is BTS Note that Offset sub op code 2 is supported only in Modes other than SA.
Page 581 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Stop Freq Same as "Stop Freq" on page 567 under Offset (Bandwidth). Abs Start Sets the absolute power level limit at the start frequency for the selected offset. The absolute power level limit ranges from –200 to +50 dBm. The fail condition for each offset channel is set remotely by [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[n][:OUTer]:LIST:TEST.
Page 582 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Mode Values LTEAFDD, -5.5 dBm, -12.5 dBm, -15.0 dBm, -15.0 dBm, -15.0 dBm, -15.0 dBm, -15.0 LTEATDD dBm, -15.0 dBm, -15.0 dBm, -15.0 dBm, -15.0 dBm, -15.0 dBm|-13.5 dBm, - 8.5 dBm, -11.5 dBm, -23.5 dBm, -23.5 dBm, -23.5 dBm, -23.5 dBm, -23.5 dBm, -23.5 dBm, -23.5 dBm, -23.5 dBm, -23.5 dBm 5G NR -5.5 dBm, -12.5 dBm, -15.0 dBm, -15.0 dBm, -15.0 dBm, -15.0 dBm, -15.0...
Page 583 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Radio Std Presets 60.00 dBm, -60.00 dBm, -60.00 dBm, -60.00 dBm 802.11ah (2MHz) 16.00 dBm, -4.00 dBm, -12.00 dBm, -63.00 dBm, -63.00 dBm, - 63.00 dBm, -63.00 dBm, -63.00 dBm, -63.00 dBm, -63.00 dBm, - 63.00 dBm, -63.00 dBm, -63.00 dBm, -63.00 dBm 802.11ah (4MHz) 16.00 dBm, -4.00 dBm, -12.00 dBm, -66.00 dBm, -66.00 dBm, -...
Page 584 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:STOP:ABSolute <real>, … Remote Command [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:STOP:ABSolute? [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:STOP:ABSolute:COUPle ON | OFF | 1 | 0, … [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2[:OUTer]:LIST:STOP:ABSolute:COUPle? :SEM:OFFS:LIST:STOP:ABS -12.50 dBm, -24.50 dBm, -24.50 dBm, -11.50 dBm, - Example 11.50 dBm, -11.50 dBm :SEM:OFFS1:LIST:STOP:ABS? :SEM:OFFS:LIST:STOP:ABS:COUP ON, OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON :SEM:OFFS:LIST:STOP:ABS:COUP? Notes Comma-separated list of values...
Page 585 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement WLAN Mode: See the table of "WLAN Mode Presets" on page 585 below When the max number of offsets is 6: Mode Values ON, OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON ON, OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON | ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON WCDMA OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON | ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON LTE, LTETDD...
Page 586 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Radio Std Presets 69.00 dBm, -69.00 dBm, -69.00 dBm, -69.00 dBm 802.11be -49.00 dBm, -49.00 dBm, -49.00 dBm, -49.00 dBm, -49.00 dBm, (80MHz/160MHz/320MHz) -49.00 dBm, -49.00 dBm, -49.00 dBm, -49.00 dBm, -49.00 dBm, -49.00 dBm, -49.00 dBm, -49.00 dBm, -49.00 dBm 802.11ac/ax (80 + 80 MHz) -69.00 dBm, -69.00 dBm, -69.00 dBm, -69.00 dBm, -69.00 dBm, -69.00 dBm, -69.00 dBm, -69.00 dBm, -69.00 dBm, -69.00 dBm,...
Page 587 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Radio Std Presets 802.11 be (320MHz) 802.11ah (1MHz/2MHz/4MHz/8MHz/16MHz) 802.11af (6MHz/7MHz/8MHz) ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, 802.11 ac/ax (80+80 MHz) ON, ON, ON ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, 802.11b/g (DSSS/CCK/PBCC) ON, ON, ON OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON,...
Page 588 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement When the max number of offsets is 12 in these modes, the preset value of Offset G ~ L is the same as the Offset F value Mode Values LTEAFDD, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB|0 dB, 0 LTEATDD, 5G dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB NR, MSR...
Page 589 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Rel Stop Sets a relative power level limit at the stop frequency for the selected offset. The relative power level limit ranges from –200 to +50 dBc. The fail condition is set remotely by [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[n] [:OUTer]:LIST:TEST for each offset channel.
Page 590 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Mode Values LTEAFDD, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB|0 dB, 0 LTEATDD, 5G dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB, 0 dB NR, MSR When the max number of offsets is 14 in these modes, the preset value of Offset G ~ N is the same as the Offset F value...
Page 591 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Radio Std Presets 160 MHz) dB, -40.00 dB 802.11be (320 MHz) -20.00 dB, -28.00 dB, -40.00 dB, -40.00 dB, -40.00 dB, -40.00 dB, - 40.00 dB, -40.00 dB, -40.00 dB, -40.00 dB, -40.00 dB, -40.00 dB, -40.00 dB, -40.00 dB 802.11ac/ax (80 MHz + -40dB, -28.00 dB, -20.00 dB, 0 dB, -20.00 dB, -28.00 dB, -40.00 dB, -...
Page 592 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement – ABSolute RELative both check the results against the respective limit – checks against both limits, failing if either of the limits is broken – only displays a fail if both of the limits are broken The absolute or relative power limit value for each offset channel can be set remotely with [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[n][:OUTer]:LIST:ABSolute...
Page 593 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement WLAN Mode Presets Radio Std Presets REL, REL, REL, REL, REL, REL, REL, 802.11b/g (DSSS/CCK/PBCC) REL, REL, REL, REL, REL, REL, REL REL, REL, REL, AND, AND, AND, AND, 802.11a/g (OFDM/DSSS-OFDM) AND, AND, AND, AND, AND, AND, AND AND, AND, AND, AND, AND, AND, AND, 802.11n/ac/ax/be (20 MHz/ 40 MHz/ 80 AND, AND, AND, AND, AND, AND, AND...
Page 594 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement When sending the command, missing values are not permitted; that is, if you want to change values 2 and 6, you must send all values up to 6. Subsequent values remain unchanged. The query returns 14 values for WLAN Mode, or 12 values for other Modes.
Page 595 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement :SEM:OFFS:LIST:STOP:SABS? :SEM:OFFS:LIST:STOP:SABS:COUP ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON :SEM:OFFS:LIST:STOP:SABS:COUP? Notes Comma separated list of values OFFSet 1 is for BTS, 2 for MS. Default is BTS Couplings Coupled to Abs2 Start if Auto is selected, that is, the Stop value is equal to the Start value Preset For WLAN Mode: 0 dBm, 0 dBm, 0 dBm, 0 dBm, 0 dBm, 0 dBm, 0 dBm, 0 dBm, 0 dBm, 0 dBm, 0 dBm, 0 dBm, 0 dBm, 0...
Page 596 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement You can turn off (not use) specific offset channels remotely using: [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[n][:OUTer]:LIST:STATe When sending the command, missing values are not permitted; that is, if you want to change values 2 and 6, you must send all values up to 6. Subsequent values remain unchanged.
Page 597 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Option SCPI Definition ETOCenter Carrier From the lowermost carrier center frequency - spacing of this Edge to carrier /2 (for lower offset), the uppermost carrier center Meas BW frequency + spacing of this carrier /2 (for upper offset) to the Center center frequency of offset measuring filter* ETOEdge...
Page 598 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Carrier Edge to Meas BW Edge | Sub-block Edge to Meas BW Center | Sub-block Edge to Meas BW Edge Mode: 5G NR [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:TYPE CTOCenter | CTOEdge | ETOCenter | Remote ETOEdge | STOCenter | STOEdge | SCTOCenter Command [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:TYPE? :SEM:OFFS:INN:TYPE ETOC...
Page 599 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Diagrams for Offset Freq Define Offset Detector "Offset Detector" on page 561. Cumulate Mask Selects whether inner offset limit masks are cumulated or not. WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 600 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:CMASk[:STATe] ON | OFF | 0 | 1 Remote Command [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:CMASk[:STATe]? :SEM:OFFS:INN:CMAS 0 Example :SEM:OFFS:INN:CMAS? Notes OFFSet 1 is for BTS, 2 for MS. Default is BTS Preset State Saved ON|OFF Range Cumulate Mask Stop Frequency Specifies stop frequency of summing limit masks.
Page 601 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement :SEM:OFFS:INN:LIST:STAT ON, ON, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF :SEM:OFFS:INN:LIST:STAT? Notes Comma-separated list of values OFFSet 1 is for BTS, 2 for MS. Default is BTS If the offset is outside the frequency range, the result spectrum will be invalid Couplings Coupled to "Stop Freq"...
Page 602 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:LIST:FREQuency:STOP? :SEM:OFFS:INN:LIST:FREQ:STOP 2.715 MHz, 3.515 MHz, 4.00 MHz, 8.00 MHz, 12.50 Example MHz, 15.0 MHz :SEM:OFFS:INN:LIST:FREQ:STOP? Notes Comma-separated list of values OFFSet 1 is for BTS, 2 for MS. Default is BTS If the offset is outside the frequency range, the result spectrum will be invalid Couplings Coupled to "Start Freq"...
Page 603 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:LIST:BANDwidth[:RESolution]? [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:LIST:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF | ON | 1 | 0, … [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:LIST:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO? :SEM:OFFS2:INN:LIST:BAND 30.0 kHz, 30.0 kHz, 30.0 kHz, 1.00 MHz,1.00 MHz, Example 1.00 MHz :SEM:OFFS2:INN:LIST:BAND? :SEM:OFFS:INN:LIST:BAND:AUTO 1,1,1,1,1,1 :SEM:OFFS:INN:LIST:BAND:AUTO? Notes Comma-separated list of values OFFSet 1 is for BTS, 2 for MS. Default is BTS Couplings Coupled to Start and Stop offset and "Meas BW"...
Page 604 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Integration BW = Meas BW * "Res BW" on page 602 Integration BW is the desired resolution bandwidth, and Res BW is the actual bandwidth for sweep. Measurement sweeps with Res BW, and Meas BW compensates sweep resolution bandwidth to Integration BW.
Page 605 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement kHz, 100.0 kHz :SEM:OFFS2:INN:LIST:BAND:VID? :SEM:OFFS2:INN:LIST:BAND:VID:AUTO ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON :SEM:OFFS2:INN:LIST:BAND:VID:AUTO? Notes Comma-separated list of values OFFSet 1 is for BTS, 2 for MS. Default is BTS Couplings When the Auto state is ON, Video BW is basically coupled with other parameters Preset Automatically Calculated ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON | ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON,...
Page 606 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Sweep Time Specifies the sweep time for the currently selected offset and enables you to toggle the Sweep Time mode between Auto and Man. When sending the remote command, missing values are not permitted; that is, if you want to change values 2 and 6, you must send all values up to 6.
Page 607 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Other than non-sweeping hardware Depends on Sweep Type: – Sweep Type “Swept”: 1 ms – Sweep Type “FFT”: 100 ns Non-sweeping hardware: N/A Sweeping hardware: 10 s Non-sweeping hardware: N/A Min/Max Depends on "Sweep Type" on page 578: Sweep Type Min/Max...
Page 608 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement :SEM:OFFS2:INN:LIST:SWE:ACQ:TIME:AUTO ON, ON, ON, ON, OFF, OFF :SEM:OFFS2:INN:LIST:SWE:ACQ:TIME:AUTO? Dependencies Available only on non-sweeping hardware Couplings Coupled to Offset Start Freq, Offset Stop Freq, RBW, and VBW when in the Auto state When you manually set a value while in Auto, the state automatically changes to Man Preset Automatically calculated State Saved...
Page 609 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:LIST:SWEep:TYPE SWEep | FFT, … Remote Command [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:LIST:SWEep:TYPE? [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:LIST:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO ON | OFF | 1 | 0, … [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:LIST:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO? :SEM:OFFS2:INN:LIST:SWE:TYPE FFT,FFT,SWE Example :SEM:OFFS2:INN:LIST:SWE:TYPE? :SEM:OFFS2:INN:LIST:SWE:TYPE:AUTO ON, ON, ON, ON, OFF, OFF :SEM:OFFS2:INN:LIST:SWE:TYPE:AUTO? Notes Comma-separated list of values OFFSet 1 is for BTS, 2 for MS.
Page 610 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:LIST:SIDE BOTH | NEGative | POSitive, … Remote Command [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:LIST:SIDE? :SEM:OFFS:INN:LIST:SIDE BOTH, NEG, NEG, POS, POS, POS Example :SEM:OFFS:INN:LIST:SIDE? Notes Comma-separated list of values OFFSet1 is for BTS, 2 for MS. Default is BTS Preset Mode Values...
Page 611 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement You can turn off (not use) specific inner offset channels remotely with [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[n]:INNer:LIST:STATe. The query returns values currently set to the absolute power test limits. When sending the remote command, missing values are not permitted; that is, if you want to change values 2 and 6, you must send all values up to 6.
Page 612 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement When sending the remote command, missing values are not permitted; that is, if you want to change values 2 and 6, you must send all values up to 6. Subsequent values remain unchanged. The query for this parameter always returns 12 values. [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:LIST:STOP:ABSolute <real>, …...
Page 613 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Rel Start Sets a relative power level limit at the start frequency for the selected inner offset, ranging from –200 to +50 dBc. The fail condition is set remotely by [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet [n]:INNer:LIST:TEST for each inner offset channel test. You can turn off (not use) specific inner offset channels remotely with [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[n]:INNer:LIST:STATe.
Page 614 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:LIST:STOP:RCARrier? Command [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:LIST:STOP:RCARrier:COUPle ON | OFF | 1 | 0, … [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:LIST:STOP:RCARrier:COUPle? :SEM:OFFS:INN:LIST:STOP:RCAR -30, -30, -30, -30, -30, -30 Example :SEM:OFFS:INN:LIST:STOP:RCAR? :SEM:OFFS:INN:LIST:STOP:RCAR:COUP ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON :SEM:OFFS:INN:LIST:STOP:RCAR:COUP? Notes Comma-separated list of values OFFSet 1 is for BTS, 2 for MS.
Page 615 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement [:SENSe]:SEMask:OFFSet[1]|2:INNer:LIST:TEST? :SEM:OFFS:INN:LIST:TEST ABS, ABS, ABS, ABS, ABS, ABS Example :SEM:OFFS:INN:LIST:TEST? Notes Comma-separated list of values ABS, ABS, ABS, ABS, ABS, ABS, ABS, ABS, ABS, ABS, ABS, ABS Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Absolute | Relative | Abs AND Rel | Abs OR Rel Show Abs2 Limit...
Page 616 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Abs2 Stop Sets the 2nd absolute power level limit at the stop frequency for the selected inner offset, ranging from –200 to +50 dBm. You can also toggle this function between Couple and Manual. If set to Couple = ON, the Abs2 Stop power level limit is coupled "Abs2 Start"...
Page 617 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement (Primary Fail Mask Checks against both Primary and Abs2 limits. The test fails selection) OR Abs2 if either of the limits is broken (Primary Fail Mask Checks against both Primary and Abs2 limits. The test fails selection) AND Abs2 if both of the limits are broken Abs2 Disabled...
Page 618 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement For further details of measurement-specific settings (if any), see "Measurement- Specific Details" on page 618 below. :COUPle ALL Remote Command :COUP ALL Example :COUPLE ALL | NONE Backwards Compatibility SCPI Backwards :COUP:NONE puts all Auto/Man parameters in manual mode, decoupling all the coupled instrument Compatibility parameters.
Page 619 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement – Span/RBW Ratio – Sweep Time – Video BANDwidth VBW/RBW ratio – Upper and Lower Tone (set to Sense) – Zero span measurement Resolution Bandwidth – Zero span measurement Dwell Time Harmonics (SA Mode only) Parameters affected by Auto Couple are: –...
Page 620 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement [:SENSe]:SEMask:BANDwidth[1]|2:INTegration? :SEM:BAND:INT 10 MHz Example :SEM:BAND:INT? Notes 10% . 100% of Channel Span Parameter Value Bandwidth sub op code, 1 is for BTS, 2 for MS. Default is BTS Note that Bandwidth sub op code 2 is supported only in non-SA Modes. In SA Mode, Bandwidth sub op code 1 is used for both BTS and MS If the ref channel is outside the frequency range, the result spectrum will be invalid Dependencies...
Page 621 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Radio Std Presets 802.11ah (16 MHz) 15.8 MHz 802.11j/p (20 MHz) 18 MHz 802.11j/p (10 MHz) 9 MHz 802.11p (5 MHz) 4.5 MHz 802.11ax/be (20 MHz) 19.5 MHz 802.11ax/be (40 MHz) 39.0 MHz 802.11ax/be (80 MHz) 79.0 MHz 802.11ax/be (160 MHz) 159.0 MHz...
Page 622 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement For WLAN 802.11ac (80 + 80 MHz), the channel span is coupled with the difference between the center frequencies of the two carriers. When the difference is either less than 80 MHz, or greater than 565 MHz, a “setting conflict”...
Page 623 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Radio Std Presets 802.11j/p (10 MHz) 9 MHz 802.11p (5 MHz) 4.5 MHz 802.11ax/be (20 MHz) 19.5 MHz 802.11ax/be (40 MHz) 39.0 MHz 802.11ax/be (80 MHz) 79.0 MHz 802.11ax/be (160 MHz) 159.0 MHz 802.11be (320 MHz) 319.0 MHz 802.11ax (80 MHz + 80 MHz) 320.0 MHz...
Page 624 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Notes Sub op code 1 is for BTS, 2 for MS. Default is BTS Note that Sweep sub op code 2 is supported only in non-SA Modes. In SA Mode, Sweep sub op code 1 is used for both BTS and MS Dependencies On non-sweeping hardware, this control is grayed out and the Auto/Man checkbox is invisible.
Page 625 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement If increased, the instrument acquires signal for the specified time duration for each chunk. It performs additional FFTs, and averages or peak-holds the FFT results for a chunk, depending on Detector settings. Note that the actual acquisition time for each chunk may exceed the Minimum Acquisition Time value, in order to satisfy FFT time required by other parameters, and to perform an integer number of FFTs.
Page 626 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type used to calculate the power in the reference channel. Sweep Type can be set manually or put into Auto mode. How to define Channel Sweep Time and Channel Sweep Type: Channel Sweep Type Behavior Mode...
Page 627 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Res BW Sets the resolution bandwidth used to calculate the power in the reference channel. The Channel Resolution BW can be set manually or put into auto mode. MSR Auto RBW: In the MSR Mode, resolution bandwidth is predefined for each radio format. When carriers are configured with multiple radio formats, the narrowest RBW is selected.
Page 628 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Radio Format 800 MHz 3 MHz 1600 MHz 3 MHz 2000 MHz 3 MHz In the LTE-Advanced (both FDD and TDD) and 5G NR modes, the resolution bandwidth is predefined based on the corresponding bandwidth of the single carrier, which is listed above.
Page 629 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement [:SENSe]:SEMask:BWIDth[1]|2[:RESolution]:AUTO SCPI Video BW Sets the video bandwidth used to calculate the power in the reference channel. The Channel Video BW can be set manually or put into Auto mode. [:SENSe]:SEMask:BANDwidth[1]|2:VIDeo <bandwidth> Remote Command [:SENSe]:SEMask:BANDwidth[1]|2:VIDeo? [:SENSe]:SEMask:BANDwidth[1]|2:VIDeo:AUTO OFF | ON | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:SEMask:BANDwidth[1]|2:VIDeo:AUTO?
Page 630 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement mode. [:SENSe]:SEMask:BANDwidth[1]|2:VIDeo:RATio <real> Remote Command [:SENSe]:SEMask:BANDwidth[1]|2:VIDeo:RATio [:SENSe]:SEMask:BANDwidth[1]|2:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO OFF | ON | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:SEMask:BANDwidth[1]|2:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO? :SEM:BAND:VID:RAT 0.1 Example :SEM:BAND:VID:RAT? :SEM:BAND:VID:RAT:AUTO ON :SEM:BAND:VID:RAT:AUTO? Notes Bandwidth sub op code, 1 is for BTS, 2 for MS. Default is BTS Note that Bandwidth sub op code 2 is supported only in non-SA Modes.
Page 631 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement SAMPle The detector indicates the instantaneous level of the signal at the center of the sweep points represented by each display point NEGative The detector determines the minimum of the signal within the sweep points Peak [:SENSe]:SEMask:DETector:CARRier[:FUNCtion] AVERage | NEGative | NORMal | Remote...
Page 632 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Sets the power reference in the carrier that will be used to compute the relative values for the offsets. 3.4.20.3 Reference Lets you set the Reference Power and parameters related to the Reference Power for SEM measurements.
Page 633 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Notes Available for all "Measurement Type" on page 632s Dependencies Not available in MSR, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, and 5G NR Modes Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Saved in instrument state Range Auto | Man Total Power Ref Sets the power in the carrier (ref channel) that is used to compute the relative power values for the offsets.
Page 634 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement [:SENSe]:SEMask:CARRier:CPSD <real> Remote Command [:SENSe]:SEMask:CARRier:CPSD? :SEM:CARR:CPSD -80 Example :SEM:CARR:CPSD? Notes Although the default value is defined, the value is recalculated by the measurement result just after completing the measurement Carrier sub op code. 1 for BTS, 2 for MS. Default is BTS Couplings Coupled with "Measurement Type"...
Page 635 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Offset/Limits Config Table This function is the same as "Offset/Limits Config Table" on page 555 under the "Settings" on page 550 tab. Sets the power reference in the carrier that will be used to compute the relative values for the offsets.
Page 636 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement For IQ measurements (CCDF, Power vs Time, Spectral Flatness, IQ Waveform or Modulation Accuracy), they are also limited by BW Option installed. when any radio standard is selected in an IQ measurement which maximum BW could not meet this radio standard request, the “Invalid result; Wider BW required” message will be displayed, and the measurement should return invalid data: Enum value ACT80...
Page 637 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state EHT | Non-HT Range Puncture Pattern Indicates which 20M is punctured: – 1110 for 11be/ax 80M: the last 20M is punctured – 11110011 for 11be/ax 160M: the fifth and sixth 20M are punctured –...
Page 638 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement not much averaging is being performed, the signal displays more like the NFE-off case; and when lots of averaging is being performed, the signal displays more like the full-NFE case. Adaptive NFE (in Modes that support it) is recommended for general-purpose use. For fully ATE (automatic test equipment) applications, where the distraction of a person using the instrument is not a risk, Full NFE is recommended.
Page 639 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement :CORR:NOIS:FLO ON Example Dependencies Only appears in instruments with the NFE or NF2 license installed. In all others, the control does not appear, but the remote command will be accepted without error (but has no effect) Couplings When NFE is enabled in any Mode manually, a prompt is displayed reminding you to perform the Characterize Noise Floor operation if it is needed.
Page 640 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement just the signal power. This is the operation when the detector is Average, and the Average Type is set to Power. In other cases, operation is often not quite as good but still highly effective. With peak detection, the noise floor is estimated based on the RBW and the duration of the bucket using the same equations used in the noise marker function.
Page 641 On instruments with the NF2 license installed, the calibrated Noise Floor used by Noise Floor Extension should be refreshed periodically. Keysight recommends that the Characterize Noise Floor operation be performed after the first 500 hours of operation, and once every calendar year.
Page 642 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement 3.4.20.6 Global The controls in this menu apply to all Modes in the instrument. Some controls (for example, "Global Center Freq" on page 1850) allow you to switch certain Meas Global parameters to a Mode Global state. These switches apply to all Modes that support global settings.
Page 643 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Global EMC Std When this control is switched ON, the current Mode’s EMC Std is copied into the Global EMC Std, and from then on all Modes that support global settings use the Global EMC Std, so you can switch between any of these Modes and the EMC Std remains unchanged.
Page 644 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement 3.4.21.1 Sweep/Control Accesses controls that let you operate the sweep and control functions of the instrument, such as Sweep Time and Continuous/Single. Sweep/Measure Lets you toggle between Continuous and Single sweep or measurement operation. The single/continuous state is Meas Global, so the setting affects all measurements.
Page 645 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement See the Trace key description under Trace Average for the averaging formula used both before and after the Average/Hold Num is reached. The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep The type of trace processing for multiple sweeps is set under the Trace key, with choices of Trace Average, Max Hold, or Min Hold Single Mode The instrument takes a single sweep when in Single mode, or if in average or...
Page 646 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Restart Restarts the current sweep, or measurement, or set of averaged/held sweeps or measurements. If you are Paused, pressing Restart performs a Resume. The front-panel key Restart performs exactly the same function. The Restart function is accessed in several ways: –...
Page 647 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement If the instrument is in the process of aligning when a Restart is executed, the alignment finishes before the restart function is performed. Even when set for Single operation, multiple sweeps may be taken when Restart is pressed (for example, when averaging/holding is on).
Page 648 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Event Trace Effect Min Hold pressed (even if already in Min Hold) Set to maxtracevalue Trace Average pressed (even if already in Trace Trace data unaffected but start new Average) sweep/avg/hold Restart pressed Trace data unaffected but start new sweep/avg/hold Parameter requiring restart changed (e.g., RBW) Trace data unaffected but start new...
Page 649 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Abort (Remote Command Only) Stops the current measurement. Aborts the current measurement as quickly as possible, resets the sweep and trigger systems, and puts the measurement into an "idle" state. If the instrument is in the process of aligning when :ABORt is sent, the alignment finishes before the abort function is performed, so...
Page 650 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement If you set this value manually, Auto Scaling automatically changes to Preset 1.0 GHz State Saved Saved in instrument state -1000 GHz 1000 GHz :DISPlay:SEMask:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:RLEVel Backwards Compatibility SCPI Scale/Div Sets the horizontal scale. :DISPlay:SEMask:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:PDIVision <freq> Remote Command :DISPlay:SEMask:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:PDIVision?
Page 651 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Compatibility SCPI Auto Scaling Toggles the scale coupling function On or Off. :DISPlay:SEMask:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:COUPle 0 | 1 | OFF | ON Remote Command :DISPlay:SEMask:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:COUPle? :DISP:SEM:WIND:TRAC:X:COUP ON Example :DISP:SEM:WIND:TRAC:X:COUP? Couplings When Auto Scaling is and the Restart front-panel key is pressed, this function automatically determines the scale per division and reference values based on the measurement results When you set a value to either "Scale/Div"...
Page 652 IF Dithering Lets you turn IF Dithering on or off. This is a technique used in unpreselected instruments (such as Keysight’s modular instruments) to enhance the rejection of images and internally-generated spurious signals. [:SENSe]:SWEep:IF:DITHer OFF | ON | 0 | 1...
Page 653 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Select Trace appears above the menu panel, indicating that it applies to all controls in the menu panel. Select Trace is blanked if you select a tab whose controls do not depend on the selected trace (for example, Trace Function). Notes The selected trace is remembered even when not in the Trace menu Dependencies...
Page 654 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Option Parameter SCPI Example Details MAXHold :TRAC3:TYPE MAXH Maximum Hold See: "Max Hold" on page 658 MINHold :TRAC5:TYPE MINH Minimum Hold See: "Min Hold" on page 658 Full descriptions of each type are provided below. You may select one of these types for each trace.
Page 655 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement In X-Series, trace averaging can be done on a per-trace basis. The Trace Modes (now called Trace Types) are Clear/Write, Trace Average, Max Hold and Min Hold. View and Blank are set separately under "View/Blank"...
Page 656 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement – :TRACe:MODE BLANk sets :TRACe:UPDate OFF, :TRACe:DISPlay OFF, for the selected trace The query returns the same value as :TRACe:TYPE?, meaning that if you set :TRACe:MODE:VIEW or :TRACe:MODE:BLANk, the query response will not be what you sent :TRACe[n]:MODE was formerly used to set the type or “writing mode”...
Page 657 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Pressing Clear/Write for the selected trace, or sending :TRAC:TYPE WRIT for the specified trace, sets the trace type to Clear/Write and clears the trace, even if you are already in Clear/Write. Then a new sweep is initiated. Trigger conditions must be met before the sweep actually starts, and if in Single the sweep won’t start until Restart is pressed.
Page 658 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Max Hold The instrument maintains and displays a max hold trace, which represents the maximum data value on a point-by-point basis of the new trace data and previous trace data. Details of the count limiting behavior may be found under Avg|Hold Number under Meas Setup.
Page 659 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Clear and Write | Restart Averaging | Restart Max/Min Hold Starts the trace writing, as though the "Trace Type" on page 1728 had just been selected. The effect is exactly the same as reselecting the current Trace Type again –...
Page 660 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Couplings Selecting a Trace Type for a trace (pressing the key or sending the equivalent command) puts the trace in Active (Update and Display ON), even if that trace type was already selected Selecting a detector for a trace (pressing the key or sending [:SENS]:DET:TRAC) puts the trace in Active (UpdateON and DisplayON), even if that detector was already selected...
Page 661 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Example Make trace 1 visible: :TRAC2:DISP 1 Blank trace 3: :TRAC3:DISP 3 Couplings Whenever you set Update to for any trace, the Display is set to for that trace Preset For Swept SA Measurement (in SA Mode): 1|0|0|0|0|0 for Trace 1;...
Page 662 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement 3.4.22.3 Math Lets you turn on and configure Trace Math functions. Math Function Trace Math functions perform mathematical operations between traces and, in some cases, user-specified offsets. When in a Trace Math function, the indicated function is performed during the sweep with the math function used in place of a detector.
Page 663 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Sets Trace 3 to Log Diff trace math function, sets the First Trace operand (for Trace 3) to Trace 1, sets the Second Trace operand (for Trace 3) to Trace 2, and sets the Log Difference reference (for Trace 3) to -6 dBm :CALC:MATH TRACE1,OFF,TRACE2,TRACE3,0,0 Turns off trace math for trace 1...
Page 664 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Trace Math Options To generate a trace math result, you must take a sweep . The trace math engine, IMPORTANT described below, operates in concert with the sweep engine in the instrument. Until a sweep has been taken, even if the constituent traces are not in Update mode, no result is generated.
Page 665 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement DestinationTrace = 10 log(10(1/10)(FirstTrace) + 10(1/10)(SecondTrace)) The values of the trace points are assumed to be in a decibel scale, as they are internally stored. If a point in either trace operand is equal to maxtracevalue, the resultant point is also maxtracevalue.
Page 666 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement The values of the operand trace points are assumed to be in decibel units (as they are internally stored) and the reference is in dBm so the result is in dBm. Example: If the first operand trace 1 is at 5 dBm, the second operand trace 2 is at –5 dBm, and the reference is –25 dBm, then the destination trace will be –15 dBm.
Page 667 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement For each active trace, the current trace point is processed for Trace 1, then Trace 2, then Trace 3, etc. Trace data is taken from either the detector for that trace, or WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 668 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement from the mathematical result of up to two other traces and an offset, depending on whether trace math is on or not. The resultant data is then fed to the Average/Hold processing block, where (if the trace type is Average, Max Hold, or Min Hold) it is processed with previous trace data.
Page 669 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement 5; for Trace 6, it presets to Trace 4 Operand 2: Trace number minus 1 (wraps at 1). For example, for Trace 1, Operand 2 presets to Trace 6; for Trace 6, it presets to Trace 5 State Saved Operands 1 and 2 for each trace are stored in instrument state Offset...
Page 670 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement From Trace Selects the trace to be copied to or exchanged with the "To Trace" on page 823 when a "Copy" on page 823 "Exchange" on page 824 is performed Preset To Trace Selects the trace to be copied from or exchanged with the "From Trace"...
Page 671 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement Exchange Executes a Trace Exchange based on the "From Trace" on page 823 "To Trace" on page 823 parameters. The From Trace and To Trace values are exchanged with each other. The action is performed once. The X-Axis settings and domain of a trace are also copied when it is exchanged with another trace.
Page 672 3 WLAN Mode 3.4 SEM Measurement 3.4.22.5 Advanced Contains controls for setting advanced trace functions of the instrument. Measure Trace Specifies which trace’s scalar results are displayed in the Metrics window, and retrieved by sending a :READ :FETCh query: – Trace 1 –...
Page 673 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement The Spurious Emissions measurement identifies and determines the power level of spurious emissions in certain frequency bands. Measurement Commands The general functionality of "CONFigure" on page 2568, "INITiate" on page 2569, "FETCh"...
Page 674 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Return Value 1 or omitted Returns a variable-length (1 + 6 * Spurs – up to 1201 entries) comma-separated list containing detailed information in the following format: Number of spurs in following list (Integer) [Repeat the following for each spur] –...
Page 675 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Return Value <Marker Number>,<Marker Trace>,<X>,<Y>,<Reserved>,<Reserved> Only markers that are enabled are included. <Reserved> items are returned as SCPI_NAN The data is returned in the current sort order as displayed in the Marker Table 3.5.1 Views This measurement has two predefined views: Name...
Page 676 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement 3.5.1.2 All Ranges Windows: "Graph" on page 676, Select All Ranges to view measurement results for all the ranges. – The upper window displays a merged trace of all the ranges – The lower window displays a list of spurs detected in a measurement cycle. The currently selected spur, which is highlighted, can be changed by the Spur control in the Meas Setup menu :DISP:SPUR:VIEW ALL...
Page 677 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement When All Ranges is selected 3.5.2.2 Table Window #2 The spurs listed are within the current value of the Marker Peak Excursion setting of the absolute limit. All the spurs listed passed. Any spur that has failed the absolute limit has an ‘F’...
Page 678 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement View Size Position Graph + Metrics Two fifth, full width Bottom Gate View One third, full width Bottom Measure Trace "Measure Trace" on page 825. Trace Type This is the trace type (and view/blank parameter) of a trace specified by Measure Trace.
Page 679 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement 3.5.2.4 Gate Window #5 Turning on "Gate View On/Off" on page 2494 displays the Gate Window, which allows you to see your gating signal at the same time as the measured data. Views in which the Gate window appears: View Size Position...
Page 680 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Ref Value Sets the value for the absolute power reference. The reference line is at the top, center, or bottom of the graticule, depending on the value of the Ref Position function. :DISPlay:SPURious:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <real> Remote Command :DISPlay:SPURious:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?
Page 681 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Preset Automatically calculated State Saved Saved in instrument state 0.10 dB 20 dB Annotation <value> dB/ left upper of graph :DISPlay:SPURious:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision Backwards Compatibility SCPI Scale Range Sets the Y-Axis scale range. <meas> Remote Command Replace with the identifier for the current measurement :DISPlay:<meas>:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RANGe <rel_ampl>...
Page 682 Meas Preset. Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are disabled, as the expected input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control.
Page 683 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Dependencies In measurements that support the I/Q inputs, unavailable when I/Q is the selected input. Replaced by the Range tab in that case Dual-Attenuator Configurations Configuration 1: Mechanical attenuator + optional electronic attenuator Configuration 2: Mechanical attenuator, no optional electronic attenuator Note that Configuration 2 is not strictly speaking a dual-section attenuator, since there is no electronic section available.
Page 684 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement (Note that depending on the measurement, there may be no Auto/Man functionality on the Mech Atten control.) In the Single-Attenuator configuration, you control the attenuation with a single control, as the fixed stage has only two states. In the Dual-Attenuator configuration, both stages have significant range, so you are given separate control of the mechanical and electronic attenuator stages.
Page 685 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement On the Meas Bar, the field “Atten” displays as follows: – If the sweep is entirely < 50 GHz, the value shown after “Atten:” is equal to Mech Atten + Elec Atten + Full Range Atten –...
Page 686 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Auto/Man is remembered and restored when the electronic attenuator is once again disabled. This is described in more detail in "Elec Atten" on page 1756 "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 687 for more information on the Auto/Man functionality Couplings If the RF Input Port is the RF Input:...
Page 687 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement For example: Dual-Attenuator configuration: Atten: 24 dB (e14) Indicating the total attenuation is at 24 dB and the electronic attenuation is at 14 dB Single-Attenuator configuration: A: 24 dB (e14) Indicating the total attenuation is at 24 dB and the “soft” attenuation is at 14 dB (see below for definition of “soft”...
Page 688 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Note that in configurations that include an Electronic Attenuator, this switch is only shown when the Electronic Attenuator is disabled. In other measurements, Mech Atten has no Auto/Man function. In these measurements, no switch is shown on the Mech Atten control: Mech Atten also appears with no switch, as above, in configurations that include an Electronic Attenuator but when the Electronic Attenuator is enabled.
Page 689 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement control and the Meas Bar The electronic attenuator, and the “soft” attenuation function provided in Single-Attenuator config- urations, are unavailable above the low band (0-3.6 GHz, 0-3.4 GHz, 0-3 GHz, depending on the model). If the low band range is from 0-3.6 GHz, and Stop Frequency of the instrument is > 3.6 GHz, then the Enabled/Disabled section of the Elec Atten control will be and grayed-out "Internal Preamp"...
Page 690 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement :POW:EATT:STAT? Preset (Disabled) for Swept SA measurement (Enabled) for all other measurements that support the electronic attenuator The maximum Center Frequency for Low Band can change based on the NOTE selected IFBW for measurements that support IFBW (for example, Waveform measurement across all Modes that support it).
Page 691 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement – The Electronic Attenuator is set to 10 dB less than the previous value of the Mechanical Attenuator, within the limitation that it must stay within the range of 0 to 24 dB of attenuation Examples in the Dual-Attenuator configuration: –...
Page 692 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement electrical attenuator. With the mechanical attenuator, TOI, SHI, and compression threshold levels increase dB-for-dB with increasing attenuation, and the noise floor does as well. With the electronic attenuator, there is an excess attenuation of about 1 to 3 dB between 0 and 3.6 GHz, making the effective TOI, SHI, and so forth, less well known.
Page 693 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping If this function is ON, it applies the adjustment described under "Adjust Atten for Min Clipping" on page 1759 each time a measurement restarts. Therefore, in Continuous measurement mode, it only executes before the first measurement. In Dual-Attenuator models, you can set Elec+Mech Atten, in which case both attenuators participate in the autoranging, or Elec Atten Only, in which case the mechanical attenuator does not participate in the autoranging.
Page 694 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Range Dual-Attenuator models: Off | Elec Atten Only | Mech + Elec Atten Single-Attenuator models: Off | On Backwards Compatibility Command Notes aliases to "Elec Atten Only" (:POW:RANG:OPT:ATT ELEC) aliases to "Off" (:POW:RANG:OPT:ATT OFF) :POW:RANG:AUTO? :POW:RANG:OPT:ATT...
Page 695 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Single-Attenuator Models Dual-Attenuator models "Adjust Atten for Min Clipping" on page 1759 "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 693 selection is Mech + Elec Atten: WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 696 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 697 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 693 selection is Elec Only. Note that the Mech Atten value is not adjusted, and the value previously set is used. Therefore, there is a case that IF Overload is still observed depending on the input signal level and the Mech Atten setting.
Page 698 All other models: 2 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state 3.5.3.3 Range (Non-attenuator models) Only available for Keysight’s modular signal analyzers and certain other Keysight products, such as VXT and M941xE. State Saved Range Represents the amplitude of the largest sinusoidal signal that could be present within the IF without being clipped by the ADC.
Page 699 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Adjust Range for Min Clipping Sets the combination of attenuation and gain based on the current measured signal level so that clipping will be at a minimum. This is an "immediate action" function, that is, it executes once, when the key is pressed.
Page 700 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Peak-to-Average Ratio Used with "Range (Non-attenuator models)" on page 1769 to optimize the level control in the instrument. The value is the ratio, in dB, of the peak power to the average power of the signal to be measured. A ratio of 0 should be used for sinusoidal signals;...
Page 701 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Mixer Lvl Offset This is an advanced setting to adjust target Range at the input mixer, which in turn affects the signal level in the instrument’s IF. This setting can be used when additional optimization is needed after setting "Peak-to-Average Ratio"...
Page 702 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement between Start Freq and Stop Freq, the instrument first performs a peak search, and then performs centering on the marker’s center frequency. The value displayed on "Preselector Adjust" on page 1774 changes to reflect the new preselector tuning.
Page 703 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement search to find 2. If the selected marker is already On, the instrument attempts the centering at that marker’s frequency. There is no preselector for signals below about 3.6 GHz, so if the marker is on a signal below 3.6 GHz, no centering is attempted, and an advisory message is generated 3.
Page 704 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement State Saved The Preselector Adjust value set by "Presel Center" on page 1773, or by manually adjusting Preselector Adjust Not saved in instrument state, and does not survive a Preset or power cycle Min/Max –/+500 MHz [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PADJust...
Page 705 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement The maximum Center Frequency for Low Band, displayed in square brackets, NOTE can change based on the selected IFBW for measurements that support IFBW (for example, Waveform measurement across all Modes that support it). In certain models (such as N9042B &...
Page 706 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement LNA is an additional preamplifier that provides superior DANL and frequency range compared to "Internal Preamp" on page 1775. LNA provides lower system noise figure, especially at frequencies above 100 MHz, and can be operated up to the full range of 50 GHz instruments.
Page 707 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement µW Path Control Options for this control include µW Preselector Bypass (Option MPB), Low Noise Path (Option LNP) and Full Bypass Enable in the High Band path circuits. When the µW Preselector is bypassed, flatness is improved, but will be subject to spurs from out of band interfering signals.
Page 708 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH STD | LNPath | MPBypass | FULL Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH? :POW:MW:PATH LNP Example Enables the Low Noise path :POW:MW:PATH? Notes When "Presel Center" on page 1773 is performed, the instrument momentarily switches to the Standard Path, regardless of the setting of µW Path Control The DC Block will always be switched in when the low noise path is switched in, to protect succeeding circuitry from DC.
Page 709 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Annotation In the Meas Bar, if the Standard path is chosen: µW Path: Standard If Low Noise Path is enabled but the LNP switch is not thrown: µW Path: LNP,Off If the Low Noise Path is enabled and the LNP switch is thrown: µW Path: LNP,On If the preselector is bypassed: µW Path: Bypass...
Page 710 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Always Presel Bypass Always Presel Bypass Spurious Always Standard Path Emissions WLAN Mode Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Modulation Always Presel Bypass Analysis Spectral Flatness Always Presel Bypasss Power vs Time Always Presel Bypass Monitor Spectrum...
Page 711 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Emissions Transmit On|Off Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and Info BW > 15 MHz, in Power which case choose Preselector Bypass Channel Quality Mode Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Group Delay Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency >...
Page 712 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement whether or not the Low Noise Path Enable is selected in the user interface. The only time the Low Noise Path is used is when Low Noise Path Enable is selected, the sweep is completely in High Band (> 3.6 GHz) and no preamp is in use. For measurements that use IQ acquisition, the low noise path is used when Center Frequency is in High Band (>...
Page 713 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement There are other times where selecting the low noise path improves performance, too. Compression-limited measurements such as finding the nulls in a pulsed-RF spectrum can profit from the low noise path in a way similar to the TOI-limited measurement illustrated.
Page 714 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Option MPB or pre-selector bypass provides an unpreselected input mixer path for certain X-Series signal analyzers with frequency ranges above 3.6 GHz. This signal path allows a wider bandwidth and less amplitude variability, which is an advantage when doing modulation analysis and broadband signal analysis.
Page 715 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement whenever Full Bypass Enable is selected, a warning message appears in the status bar: “Full Bypass Enabled, maximum safe input power reduced” Microwave Preselector Bypass Backwards Compatibility Example Bypass the microwave preselector: :POW:MW:PRES OFF Notes Included for Microwave Preselector Bypass backwards compatibility STD)
Page 716 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Settings Alert message in the error queue Allow Full Bypass in Auto Enable or disable Full Bypass in µW Path Auto rule. See "µW Path Control" on page 1778. When this function is ON, and "µW Path Control"...
Page 717 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Software Preselection Provided in some instruments, either to compensate for issues with provided hardware preselection or to provide the preselection function when there is no hardware preselector. N9041B Software Preselection compensates for the frequency range limit of the microwave preselector.
Page 718 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement traces is used. This provides a method to reduce spurs that are internally generated within the VXT, but you should note the following when using Software Preselection: – There is some speed cost due to the need to take multiple captures –...
Page 719 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement – NORMal - mathematically removes all image and multiple responses of signals present at the input – ADVanced - any trace processing (such as “max hold” or trace averaging) is performed on the points of both candidate traces before the “select minimum” operation occurs.
Page 720 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement method Grayed-out when "Software Preselection" on page 1788 is OFF. The grayout message is “Unavailable unless SW Presel enabled” For N9042B+V3050A, the parameter is SCPI-only, and always set to NARRow when Software Preselection is enabled Preset NORMal N9041B...
Page 721 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Meas Mode Preset BASIC, WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA WCDMA WCDMA PCON WCDMA EVMQ WCDMA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA...
Page 722 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement :DISPlay:SPURious:FREQuency:CENTer[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :DISPlay:SPURious:FREQuency:CENTer[:STATe]? :DISP:SPUR:FREQ:CENT ON Example :DISP:SPUR:FREQ:CENT? Preset State Saved 3.5.5.2 Annotation Contains controls for setting up the annotation for the current Mode or Measurement. Graticule Turns the display graticule On or Off for all windows with graticules in all measurements in the current Mode.
Page 723 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement :DISPlay:ANNotation:SCReen[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :DISPlay:ANNotation:SCReen[:STATe]? :DISP:ANN:SCR OFF Example Dependencies Grayed-out and forced to when System Display Settings, Annotation is Preset This remains through a Preset when System Display Settings, Annotation is set to State Saved Saved in instrument state Trace Annotation...
Page 724 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Meas Bar Turns the Measurement Bar at the top of the screen on and off for all measurements in the current Mode. When OFF, the graticule area expands to fill the area formerly occupied by the Measurement Bar.
Page 725 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Name Command :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:SELect Select User View :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:REName Rename User View :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:DELete Delete User View :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:NAME Create User View :INSTrument:SCReen:SELect Select Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:DELete Delete Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:DELete:ALL Delete All But This Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:CREate Add Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:REName Rename Screen :SYSTem:SEQuencer...
Page 726 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement :DISPlay:SPURious:VIEW[:SELect] RESult | ALL Remote Command :DISPlay:SPURious:VIEW[:SELect]? :DISP:SPUR:VIEW RANG Example :DISP:SPUR:VIEW? RESult Preset State Saved Range Graph + Metrics | All Ranges Graph + Metrics Windows: "Graph" on page 676,"Table" on page 677 Select Graph + Metrics to view measurement results.
Page 727 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Example Select Baseband as the current View :DISP:VIEW:ADV:SEL “Baseband” Notes You must be in the measurement whose View you are trying to set to send the command. You can only set Views for the current measurement using this command For predefined views, the parameter is derived from the view name that is shown in the View list in the user interface.
Page 728 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Notes <alphanumeric> is case insensitive; you can specify mixed case, however the name will be evaluated on a single case <alphanumeric> name already exists as a View, the error message “-224, Illegal parameter value; View <alphanumeric>...
Page 729 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement :DISP:VIEW:ADV:DEL Example Notes <alphanumeric> is case insensitive; you can specify mixed case, however the name will be evaluated on a single case If the <alphanumeric> is not present in the list of View names, the error message “-224, Illegal parameter value;...
Page 730 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement If you switch measurements with the display disabled (via :DISP:ENAB OFF), then query the list of available Views, the result is undefined User View Listing Query Returns a string containing a comma-separated list of names for only the User Views available for the current Measurement.
Page 731 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement frequency value. If this is the case, then a Global tab appears in the Meas Setup menu. The Center Frequency function sets (and queries) the center frequency for the currently selected input. If your instrument has multiple inputs, and you select another input, Center Frequency changes to the value for that input.
Page 732 3.755 GHz 7.5 GHz 7.575 GHz F13 (CXA-m) 6.805 GHz 13.6 GHz 13.8 GHz F26 (CXA-m) 13.255 GHz 26.5 GHz 26.55 GHz 504 (M9421A, M8920A) 2.145 GHz 3.88GHz 3.88 GHz 506 (M9421A, M8920A) 3.245 GHz 6.08GHz 6.08 GHz F06 (M9410A/11A) 1.0 GHz 6.08 GHz 6.08 GHz...
Page 733 The following table shows the Center Frequency Presets and Range for VXT modes with Radio Heads/CIU. Products with Radio Heads/CIU Preset Start frequency Stop frequency M9421A + CIU 6 GHz 5.9 GHz 12 GHz M9410A + CIU 6 GHz 5.9 GHz...
Page 734 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement RF Center Freq Specifies the RF Center Frequency. Sets the center frequency to use when the RF input is selected, even if the RF input is not the input that is selected at the time the command is sent.
Page 735 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement harmonic range in the Harmonic Table. Center Frequency thus presets to the point arithmetically equidistant from these two frequencies Note that, if the current measurement has a limited span/range available to it, and cannot achieve the span shown in the table (Range = Stop Freq –...
Page 736 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]? Example Increase the current center frequency value by 500 MHz: :FREQ:CENT:STEP 500 MHz :FREQ:CENT UP Notes Preset and Max values depend on Hardware Options Dependencies Not available in MSR, LTE-A FDD/TDD and 5G NR Modes If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to change the value of the center frequency >3.6 GHz by pressing the Up-arrow key, fails and results in an advisory message.
Page 737 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement The Select Marker control appears above the menu panel, indicating that it applies to all controls in the Marker menu panels. Select Marker is blanked if you select a tab whose controls do not depend on the selected marker (for example, Counter). On any menu tab that displays Select Marker, the first control is always Marker Frequency | Time.
Page 738 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Marker X Axis Position (Remote Command Only) Sets the marker X-Axis Scale position in trace points. This setting has no effect if the control mode is Off, but is the SCPI equivalent of entering a value if the control mode is Normal or Delta - except in trace points rather than X-Axis Scale units.
Page 739 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement State Saved :CALCulate:SPURious:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:FUNCtion:RESult? Backwards Compatibility SCPI Marker Mode Sets the marker control mode to POSition (Normal), DELta, or OFF. All interactions and dependencies detailed under the control description are enforced when the remote command is sent. If the selected marker is OFF, pressing Marker sets it to POSition and places it at the center of the screen on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules.
Page 740 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement :CALCulate:SPURious:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:STATe OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Backwards Compatibility :CALCulate:SPURious:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:STATe? SCPI Delta Marker (Reset Delta) Pressing this control has exactly the same effect as selecting Delta in "Marker Mode" on page 739. The selected marker becomes a Delta Marker. If the selected marker is already a Delta marker, the reference marker is moved to the current position of the selected marker, thus resetting the Delta to zero.
Page 741 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement 3.5.7.3 Peak Search The controls on this tab allow you to move the marker to selected peaks of the signal, giving you enormous analysis capabilities, particularly when combined with the Delta Marker function. Pressing the Peak Search hardkey automatically moves you to the Peak Search NOTE page of the Marker menu and performs a peak search.
Page 742 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement If the selected marker was OFF, then it is turned on as a POSition marker and a peak search is performed. :CALCulate:SPURious:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:MAXimum:NEXT Remote Command :CALC:SPUR:MARK2:MAX:NEXT Example Notes Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker State Saved Not part of saved state Next Pk Right...
Page 743 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Pk-Pk Search Finds and displays the amplitude and frequency differences between the highest and lowest y-axis value. It places the selected marker on the minimum value on its selected trace, and places that marker’s reference marker on the peak of its selected trace.
Page 744 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Relative To Selects the marker to which the selected marker is relative (its reference marker). Every marker has another marker to which it is relative. This marker is referred to as the “reference marker” for that marker. This attribute is set by the Marker, Properties, Relative To control.
Page 745 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement it was on to the new trace. If the marker is OFF, it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace. The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed. :CALCulate:SPURious:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:TRACe:ATTached TRACe1 | TRACe2 | TRACe3 Remote Command...
Page 746 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement :SPUR:AVER:COUN? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max 1/10000 Averaging On/Off Turns Averaging on or off. In this measurement, the Average Type is preset to the Log-Pwr Avg (Video) NOTE method. Other averaging methods are not available. [:SENSe]:SPURious:AVERage[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:SPURious:AVERage[:STATe]?
Page 747 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Average Type Enables you to control the way averaging is done by choosing one of the following averaging scales: Log-Power (Video) or Power (RMS). There are three different averaging processes in the measurement, and all of them are affected by this setting: Trace Averaging, the Average detector, and VBW filtering.
Page 748 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Type Single Continuous No Spurs Found Spurs Found No Spurs Found Spurs Found Spurs’ happening the measurement trace and the ‘No reported. On is displayed is set to the idle Spurs’ happening completion the state and the is displayed SA is set to the...
Page 749 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Type Single Continuous No Spurs Found Spurs Found No Spurs Found Spurs Found displayed results [:SENSe]:SPURious:TYPE EXAMine | FULL Remote Command [:SENSe]:SPURious:TYPE? :SPUR:TYPE FULL Example :SPUR:TYPE? EXAMine Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state EXAMine|FULL Range Spur...
Page 750 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Spur Report Mode Selects the spurious report mode. Options are: LIMTest Limit Line Report only spurs above the limit line. Any spurs reported will Test cause the measurement to fail. See Abs Start Limit for more information All Spurs Report all spurs detected by Peak Threshold and Peak Excursion...
Page 751 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Bandwidth Lets you set RBW and VBW parameters for each range, as well as Filter Type. The Bandwidth tab appears in all Modes except MSR. Frequency Range Allows you to switch the displayed Frequency Range columns. When selected, Start Frequency, Stop Frequency, Center Frequency, and Span are displayed.
Page 752 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement WCDMA: ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF LTETDD, LTEATDD, 5G NR: OFF, OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF LTE, LTEAFDD: ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF,...
Page 753 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement 1.5 GHz LTE, LTEAFDD: 9 kHz, 150 kHz, 30 MHz, 1 GHz, 1.92GHz, 1.98 GHz, 2.18 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz WLAN: 9 kHz, 150 kHz, 30 MHz, 1GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz...
Page 754 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement 2.5GHz LTE, LTEAFDD Modes: 150kHz, 30MHz, 1GHz, 1.92GHz, 1.98GHz, 2.1GHz, 12.75GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz WLAN Mode: 150kHz, 30 MHz, 1GHz, 12.75GHz, 2.5 GHz, 2.5 GHz, 2.5 GHz , 2.5 GHz, 2.5 GHz, 2.5 GHz, 2.5 GHz, 2.5 GHz, 2.5 GHz, 2.5 GHz, 2.5 GHz, 2.5 GHz, 2.5 GHz, 2.5 GHz, 2.5 GHz, 2.5 GHz MSR Mode: 150kHz, 30MHz, 1GHz, 1.92GHz, 1.98GHz, 2.1GHz, 12.75GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz, 2.5GHz...
Page 755 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Return the current value of Center Frequency: :FREQ:CENT? Notes This command sets the RF, External Mixing or I/Q Center Frequency depending on the selected input – For RF input it is equivalent to :FREQ:RF:CENT –...
Page 756 3.755 GHz 7.5 GHz 7.575 GHz F13 (CXA-m) 6.805 GHz 13.6 GHz 13.8 GHz F26 (CXA-m) 13.255 GHz 26.5 GHz 26.55 GHz 504 (M9421A, M8920A) 2.145 GHz 3.88GHz 3.88 GHz 506 (M9421A, M8920A) 3.245 GHz 6.08GHz 6.08 GHz F06 (M9410A/11A) 1.0 GHz 6.08 GHz 6.08 GHz...
Page 757 The following table shows the Center Frequency Presets and Range for VXT modes with Radio Heads/CIU. Products with Radio Heads/CIU Preset Start frequency Stop frequency M9421A + CIU 6 GHz 5.9 GHz 12 GHz M9410A + CIU 6 GHz 5.9 GHz...
Page 758 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Preset "Center Frequency Presets" on page 755 above State Saved Saved in instrument state -79.999995 MHz "Center Frequency Presets" on page 755 above. Basically, instrument maximum frequency –5 Hz If the knob or step keys are being used, also depends on span (see "Range Settings"...
Page 759 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement I/Q Center Freq Specifies the I/Q Center Frequency. Sets the center frequency to use when the I/Q input is selected, even if the I/Q input is not the input that is selected at the time the command is sent.
Page 760 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement The location of where the resolution bandwidth occurs in the list sent to the measurement corresponds to the range the value is associated with. When sending the remote command, missing values are not permitted. In other words, if you want to change values 2 and 6, then you must send all values up to 6.
Page 761 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement [:SENSe]:SPURious[:RANGe][:LIST]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO? :SPUR:BWID:AUTO ON, ON, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON, OFF, Example OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, ON :SPUR:BWID:AUTO? Preset OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, SA Mode ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, ON,...
Page 762 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 Preset State Saved 1000 Min/Max [:SENSe]:SPURious[:RANGe][:LIST]:BWIDth:IMULti Backwards Compatibility SCPI Video BW Sets the Video BW mode of the instrument. This can be Auto, where the instrument determines the optimum setting, or Manual, where you determine the setting.
Page 763 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement [:SENSe]:SPURious[:RANGe][:LIST]:BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO OFF | ON | 0 | 1, OFF Remote | ON | 0 | 1, OFF | ON | 0 | 1, OFF | ON | 0 | 1, OFF | ON | 0 | 1, OFF | ON Command | 0 | 1, OFF | ON | 0 | 1, OFF | ON | 0 | 1, OFF | ON | 0 | 1, OFF | ON | 0 | 1, OFF | ON | 0 | 1, OFF | ON | 0 | 1, OFF | ON | 0 | 1, OFF | ON | 0 | 1,...
Page 764 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Enabled Same as the Enabled checkbox under the Bandwidth tab. See"Enabled" on page Frequency Type Selects the frequency type as either ABSolute or OFFSet: ABSolute The frequency range is determined by Abs Start Freq and Abs Stop Freq. Absolute and offset frequencies are not coupled OFFSet The frequency range is determined based on Offset Start Freq and Offset Stop...
Page 765 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement ABSolute, ABSolute, ABSolute, ABSolute, ABSolute, ABSolute State Saved Saved in instrument state ABSolute|OFFSet Range Abs Start Freq Sets the start frequency of the instrument. This parameter can send up to 20 values. The location where the start frequency occurs in the list sent to the measurement corresponds to the range the value is associated with.
Page 766 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement This parameter is coupled with either "Offset Start Freq" on page 766 "Offset Stop Freq" on page 767. The coupling equations are shown in "Enabled" on page 764. The location of where the stop frequency occurs in the list sent to the measurement corresponds to the range the value is associated with.
Page 767 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement This value is clipped to keep Abs Start/Stop Freq within the available frequency range. This clipping applies even when OB Start Freq, OB Stop Freq or Offset Side is changed. [:SENSe]:SPURious[:RANGe][:LIST]:OFFSet:FREQuency:STARt <freq>, <freq>, Remote <freq>, <freq>, <freq>, <freq>, <freq>, <freq>, <freq>, <freq>, <freq>, Command...
Page 768 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement State Saved Min/Max -79999990/SA Max Frequency (Hardware Dependent) Offset Side Sets the offset side to either Negative or Positive. This parameter indicates which side of the operation band the specified range is on. It also determines which coupling equations defined in Frequency Type section are used to couple the absolute frequencies and the offset frequencies.
Page 769 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement SSTop Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Range All | Start/Stop Frequency | Center Frequency/Span Enabled Same as Enabled under the Bandwidth index tab. See"Enabled" on page 751. Start Freq Same as the Start Freq column under the Bandwidth index tab. See"Start Freq"...
Page 770 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Span Same as the Span column under the Bandwidth index tab. See "Span" on page 759. Attenuation Defines attenuation value for each range: The Attenuation value under AMPTD Y Scale is used This value is used as mechanical attenuation value without electric attenuation [:SENSe]:SPURious[:RANGe][:LIST]:ATTenuation <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ Remote ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_...
Page 771 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement IF Gain Sets IF Gain to: Auto, On (the extra 10 dB) or Off. These settings affect sensitivity and IF overloads. A switched IF amplifier with approximately 10 dB of gain is available. This amplifier takes full advantage of the RF dynamic range of the instrument.
Page 772 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, Preset OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Low | High Enabled Same as the Enabled checkbox under the Bandwidth tab. See "Enabled"...
Page 773 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement 4.7kHz, 47kHz, 470kHz, 5MHz, 5MHz, 5MHz, 5MHz, 300kHz, 300kHz, 300kHz, 300kHz, 300kHz, 300kHz, 300kHz, 300kHz, 300kHz, 300kHz, 300kHz, 300kHz, 300kHz 5G NR Mode: 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 100 kHz, 100 kHz, 100 kHz, 100 kHz, 300 kHz, 300 kHz, 300 kHz, 300 kHz, 300 kHz, 300 kHz, 300 kHz, 300 kHz, 300 kHz, 300 kHz, 300 kHz, 300 kHz, 300 kHz State Saved Saved in instrument state...
Page 774 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement [:SENSe]:SPURious[:RANGe][:LIST]:ATTenuation <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ Remote ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ Command ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl>, <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:SPURious[:RANGe][:LIST]:ATTenuation? :SPUR:ATT 10dB, 10dB, 10dB, 10dB, 10dB, 10dB, 10dB, 10dB, 10dB, 10dB, 10dB, Example 10dB, 10dB, 10dB, 10dB, 10dB, 10dB, 10dB, 10dB, 10dB :SPUR:ATT?
Page 775 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement displayed. This control appears only in instruments with a 4U size front panel. :DISPlay:SPURious:VIEW:RANGe:TABLe:FMODe ALL | SSTop | CSPan Remote Command :DISPlay:SPURious:VIEW:RANGe:TABLe:FMODe? :DISP:SPUR:VIEW:RANG:TABL:FMOD ALL Example :DISP:SPUR:VIEW:RANG:TABL:FMOD? SSTop Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Range All | Start/Stop Frequency | Center Frequency/Span Enabled...
Page 776 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement This parameter can send up to 20 values. The location in the list sent corresponds to the range of the associated value. When sending the remote command, missing values are not permitted. If you want to change values 2 and 6, then you must send all values up to 6.
Page 777 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement with the computed values being clipped to a minimum of 601 and a maximum of 20001. [:SENSe]:SPURious[:RANGe][:LIST]:SWEep:POINts <integer> Remote Command [:SENSe]:SPURious[:RANGe][:LIST]:SWEep:POINts? :SPUR:SWE:POIN 1001,1001,1001 Example :SPUR:SWE:POIN? Preset SA, 5G NR Modes: +601, +601, +601, +601, +601, +601, +601, +601, +601, +601, +601, +601, +601, +601, +601, +601, +601, +601, +601, +601 WCDMA Mode: 601, 2985, 9700, 1100, 601, 601, 601, 10570, 601, 601, 601, 601, 601, 601, 601, 601, 601, 601, 601, 601...
Page 778 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement | NEGative | NORMal | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS, AVERage | NEGative | NORMal | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS, AVERage | NEGative | NORMal | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS, AVERage | NEGative | NORMal | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS, AVERage | NEGative | NORMal | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS, AVERage | NEGative | NORMal | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS, AVERage | NEGative | NORMal | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS, AVERage | NEGative | NORMal | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS, AVERage |...
Page 779 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement :SPUR:DET2? Notes For backward compatibility, “NORMal” is available as a SCPI command parameter. However, this is treated same as “RMS” internally, so the query never returns “NORMal” as its results OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, Preset OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF State Saved...
Page 780 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Span Same as the Span column under the Bandwidth tab. See "Span" on page 759. This column does not appear in MSR mode. Abs Start Limit Determines the limit above which spurs will report a failing. If Abs Stop Limit Mode is set to Auto, this is coupled to Abs Stop Limit to make a flat limit line.
Page 781 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement -50dBm, -50dBm WLAN Mode: -36dBm, -36dBm, -36dBm, -30dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, - 50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max -200.0 dBm/50.0 dBm Abs Stop Limit Determines the limit above which spurs will report a failing.
Page 782 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement WLAN Mode: -36dBm, -36dBm, -36dBm, -30dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, - 50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm, -50dBm State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max -200.0 dBm/50.0 dBm Auto Function :CALCulate:SPURious[:RANGe][:LIST]:LIMit:ABSolute[:UPPer]:DATA:STOP:AUTO OFF Remote...
Page 783 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement +6.00000000E+000, +6.00000000E+000, +6.00000000E+000, +6.00000000E+000, +6.00000000E+000, +6.00000000E+000, +6.00000000E+000, +6.00000000E+000 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max 0.0 dB/100.0 dB Pk Threshold Sets the minimum amplitude of signals that can be identified as peaks. For example, if a value of -90 dBm is selected, only peaks that rise and fall more than the peak excursion value which are above –90 dBm are identified.
Page 784 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement accurate measurements and optimum dynamic range. Auto Couple is an immediate action function, and when it is executed, all the Auto/Man controls for the current measurement are set to Auto, and all measurement settings coupled to the Auto/Man parameters are automatically set to their optimal values.
Page 785 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement – Center Frequency Step – Resolution Bandwidth – Span/RBW Ratio – Sweep Time – Video BANDwidth VBW/RBW ratio – Upper and Lower Tone (set to Sense) – Zero span measurement Resolution Bandwidth – Zero span measurement Dwell Time Harmonics (SA Mode only) Parameters affected by Auto Couple are: –...
Page 786 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement – When set to OFF, all detected spurs are reported. This is the same as Spurious Report Mode [:SENSe]:SPURious:FSMeas ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:SPURious:FSMeas? :SPUR:FSM ON Example :SPUR:FSM? :SPUR:REPT:MODE is ALL, this parameter is Couplings...
Page 787 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement :RAD:STAN AG Example :RAD:STAN? Notes If the command is sent with unsupported parameters, an error is generated “Settings conflict; option not installed” For IQ measurements (CCDF, Power vs Time, Spectral Flatness, IQ Waveform or Modulation Accuracy), they are also limited by BW Option installed.
Page 788 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement case; and when lots of averaging is being performed, the signal displays more like the full-NFE case. Adaptive NFE (in Modes that support it) is recommended for general-purpose use. For fully ATE (automatic test equipment) applications, where the distraction of a person using the instrument is not a risk, Full NFE is recommended.
Page 789 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Dependencies Only appears in instruments with the NFE or NF2 license installed. In all others, the control does not appear, but the SCPI command is accepted without error (but has no effect) Couplings If NFE is enabled in any Mode manually, a prompt is displayed reminding you to perform the Charac- terize Noise Floor operation if it is needed If NFE is enabled via SCPI and a Characterize Noise Floor operation is needed, an error will be entered...
Page 790 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement just the signal power. This is the operation when the detector is Average, and the Average Type is set to Power. In other cases, operation is often not quite as good but still highly effective. With peak detection, the noise floor is estimated based on the RBW and the duration of the bucket using the same equations used in the noise marker function.
Page 791 On instruments with the NF2 license installed, the calibrated Noise Floor used by Noise Floor Extensions should be refreshed periodically. Keysight recommends that the Characterize Noise Floor operation be performed after the first 500 hours of operation, and once every calendar year.
Page 792 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement When Mode Preset is pressed while Global Center Freq is ON, the Global Center Freq is preset to the preset Center Frequency of the current Mode. This function resets to when "Restore Defaults" on page 1852 is pressed, or when System, Restore Defaults, All Modes is pressed.
Page 793 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Restore Defaults Resets all functions in the Global settings menu to OFF. Pressing System, Restore Defaults, All Modes has the same effect. :INSTrument:COUPle:DEFault Remote Command :INST:COUP:DEF Example :GLOBal:DEFault Backwards Compatibility SCPI 3.5.9 Sweep Accesses controls to configure and control the acquisition of data, and the X-axis parameters of the instrument.
Page 794 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Note that :SYST:PRES sets :INIT:CONT to ON, but *RST sets :INIT:CONT State Saved Saved in instrument state Annunciation The Single/Continuous icon in the Meas Bar changes depending on the setting: – A line with an arrow is Single –...
Page 795 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement If the instrument is already in Single sweep, :INIT:CONT OFF has no effect. If the instrument is already in Single sweep, then pressing Cont/Single in the middle of a sweep does not restart the sweep or sequence. Similarly, pressing Cont/Single does not restart the sweep or sequence if the sweep is not in the idle state (for example, if you are taking a very slow sweep, or the instrument is waiting for a trigger).
Page 796 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement MEASURING bit is set :INIT:REST Backwards For Spectrum Analysis Mode in ESA and PSA, the Restart hardkey and the command Compatibility restarted trace averages (displayed average count reset to 1) for a trace in Clear Write, but did not Notes restart Max Hold and Min Hold :INIT:REST...
Page 797 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Trace Update The numeric results are not blanked at any time during the restart cycle. For slow sweeps (see Trace Update section in Trace/Detector), the traces are updated real-time during the sweep. There may be a special circumstance in application mode measurements where an exception is made and the traces and/or results need to be blanked before displaying the new results.
Page 798 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Pause/Resume Pauses a measurement after the current data acquisition is complete. When paused, the label on the control changes to Resume. Pressing Resume un- pauses the measurement. When paused, pressing Restart performs a Resume. :INITiate:PAUSe Remote Command :INITiate:RESume...
Page 799 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement 3.5.9.2 Sweep Config Accesses controls that enable you to configure the Sweep and Control functions of the instrument, such as Sweep Rules. Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type of the spurious measurement to either Auto or Swept. When in Auto, the selections of swept type of ranges are governed by the Best Speed Sweep Type Rule, and FFT analysis might be chosen for some ranges if it speeds up the measurement.
Page 800 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement :SPUR:SWE:TIME:AUTO:RUL? Notes This command is implemented as [:SENSe]:SPURious[:RANGe] [:LIST]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes to avoid illegal SCPI node definition, so this command should be used as [:SENSe]:SPURious:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes Dependencies Does not appear in SA Mode in VXT NORMal Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state...
Page 801 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Invalid Data Indicator The Invalid Data Indicator is displayed whenever the data on the display does not match the settings of the instrument. The most common example of this is when instrument settings have changed in the time since the data in the traces on the display was taken.
Page 802 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement If you now tap or click on one of the items in this menu, the instrument will perform the corresponding function. Peak Search finds the highest peak on the selected Trace. Clear/Write, Trace Average, Max Hold and Min Hold set the "Trace Type"...
Page 803 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement In this menu, Peak Search works as above. Peak Search all Traces finds the highest peak in the Waterfall window. Add Marker Here takes the lowest numbered Marker that is currently Off and turns it On as a Normal marker in the Waterfall window at the point where you right-clicked (or touched-and-held).
Page 804 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Top Line On the top line, each trace number is shown, in the trace color. A box is drawn around the currently selected trace. Middle Line Below each trace number, is a letter signifying the trace type for that trace number, where Clear/Write Trace Average...
Page 805 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement – Trace 1: Visible, being updated, in Clear/Write, with Normal detector auto selected – Trace 2: Visible, being updated, in Clear/Write, being written to with a math function – Trace 3: Visible, not updating, data was taken in Max Hold, with the peak detector auto selected –...
Page 806 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement 3.5.10.1 Select Trace Specifies the selected trace, which is the trace that will be affected when you change trace settings. Select Trace appears above the menu panel, indicating that it applies to all controls in the menu panel.
Page 807 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Trace Type There are four trace Types: Option Parameter SCPI Example Details WRITe :TRAC2:TYPE WRIT Clear/Write See: "Clear/Write" on page 810 AVERage :TRAC2:TYPE AVER Trace Average See: "Trace Average" on page 810 MAXHold :TRAC3:TYPE MAXH Maximum Hold See:...
Page 808 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Trace Mode Backwards Compatibility Commands In earlier instruments, the “Trace Modes” were: Clear/Write, Max Hold, Min Hold, View and Blank. Averaging was global to all traces and was controlled under the BW/Avg menu. In X-Series, trace averaging can be done on a per-trace basis.
Page 809 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement – :TRACe:MODE MINHold sets :TRACe:TYPE MINHold (Min Hold). It also sets :TRACe:UPDate :TRACe:DISPlay ON, for the selected trace – :TRACe:MODE VIEW :TRACe:UPDate OFF, :TRACe:DISPlay ON, for the selected sets trace – :TRACe:MODE BLANk sets :TRACe:UPDate OFF,...
Page 810 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Trace Type Details Clear/Write Each trace update replaces the old data in the trace with new data. Pressing Clear/Write for the selected trace, or sending :TRAC:TYPE WRIT for the specified trace, sets the trace type to Clear/Write and clears the trace, even if you are already in Clear/Write.
Page 811 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement – Once the new sweep starts, the trace is overwritten with current trace data as the first trace of the new average Remember that restarting averaging also restarts Max Hold and Min Hold, as there is only one count for Trace Average and Hold.
Page 812 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement – The average/hold count k is set to 1, so that the next time the min hold trace is displayed it simply represents one trace of new data – A new sweep is initiated Remember that restarting Min Hold also restarts Max Hold and averaging, because there is only one count for Trace Average and Hold.
Page 813 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement See: "More Information" on page 814 Notes For the commands to control the two variables, Update and Display, see "Trace Update State On/Off" on page 813 "Trace Display State On/Off" on page 813 below Dependencies When Signal ID is on, this key is grayed-out...
Page 814 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement :TRACe[1]|2|3:<meas>:DISPlay[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 :TRACe[1]|2|3:<meas>:DISPlay[:STATe]? where <meas> is the identifier for the current measurement Example Make trace 1 visible: :TRAC2:DISP 1 Blank trace 3: :TRAC3:DISP 3 Couplings Whenever you set Update to for any trace, the Display is set to for that trace Preset...
Page 815 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Note that putting a trace into Display=OFF and/or Update=OFF does not restart the sweep and does not restart Averaging or Hold functions for any traces. 3.5.10.3 Math Lets you turn on and configure Trace Math functions. Math Function Trace Math functions perform mathematical operations between traces and, in some cases, user-specified offsets.
Page 816 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Sets Trace 3 to Log Offset trace math function, sets the First Trace operand (for Trace 3) to Trace 1, leaves the Second Trace operand (for Trace 3) unchanged (it is irrelevant for this function) and sets the Log Offset (for Trace 3) to -6 dB :CALC:MATH TRACE3,LDIF,TRACE1,TRACE2,0,-6.00 Sets Trace 3 to Log Diff trace math function, sets the First Trace operand (for Trace 3) to Trace 1, sets...
Page 817 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement and the function is annotated on the trace if Trace Annotation is on Status Bits/OPC *OPC can be used to detect the completion of a sweep, which will also correspond to the completion dependencies of the math operation, since all math takes place during the sweep Trace Math Options...
Page 818 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Power Sum (Op1 + Op2) Calculates a power sum between the First Trace operand and the Second Trace operand and puts the result in the destination trace. During the sweep, the following formula is executed for each point in the trace operands, and the corresponding point is generated for the destination trace.
Page 819 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement B+DL function in some older instruments. The Reference is entered on the Reference control, which only appears when this math function is in force for the selected trace. Each destination trace has its own reference. During the sweep, the following formula is executed for each point in the trace operands, and the corresponding point is generated for the destination trace.
Page 820 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement For each active trace, the current trace point is processed for Trace 1, then Trace 2, then Trace 3, etc. Trace data is taken from either the detector for that trace, or WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 821 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement from the mathematical result of up to two other traces and an offset, depending on whether trace math is on or not. The resultant data is then fed to the Average/Hold processing block, where (if the trace type is Average, Max Hold, or Min Hold) it is processed with previous trace data.
Page 822 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement 5; for Trace 6, it presets to Trace 4 Operand 2: Trace number minus 1 (wraps at 1). For example, for Trace 1, Operand 2 presets to Trace 6; for Trace 6, it presets to Trace 5 State Saved Operands 1 and 2 for each trace are stored in instrument state Offset...
Page 823 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement From Trace Selects the trace to be copied to or exchanged with the "To Trace" on page 823 when a "Copy" on page 823 "Exchange" on page 824 is performed Preset To Trace Selects the trace to be copied from or exchanged with the "From Trace"...
Page 824 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Exchange Executes a Trace Exchange based on the "From Trace" on page 823 "To Trace" on page 823 parameters. The From Trace and To Trace values are exchanged with each other. The action is performed once. The X-Axis settings and domain of a trace are also copied when it is exchanged with another trace.
Page 825 3 WLAN Mode 3.5 Spurious Emissions Measurement 3.5.10.5 Advanced Contains controls for setting advanced trace functions of the instrument. Measure Trace Specifies which trace’s scalar results are displayed in the Metrics window, and :READ :FETCh retrieved by sending a query: –...
Page 826 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement This measurement provides modulation analysis capabilities for signals complying with 802.11a/b/j/p/g/n/ac/ah/af/ax/be standards. The definition and requirement for modulation analysis measurement in different standards refer to the following table: Standard Date Sections IEEE Std 802.11a-1999(R2003)
Page 827 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :FETCh:EVM[n]? :READ:EVM[n]? :MEASure:EVM[n]? Remote Command Results for Modulation Analysis Measurement When Radio Std is 802.11ac/ax 80+80MHz, these measurement results are also for one channel. Using SCPI :CALCulate:EVM:SEGM to specify that these contents are the first segment results or the second segment results.
Page 828 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 15. Gain Imbalance Max 16. Gain Imbalance Avg 17. Quadrature error Max (degrees) 18. Quadrature error Avg (degrees) 19. Avg Burst Power Max (dBm) 20. Avg Burst Power Avg (dBm) 21.
Page 829 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 42. Reserved for 802.11b, return –999.0 43. Burst Number analyzed in the last acquisition 44. Number of PSDU bytes 45. Number of symbols 46. Time Offset (seconds) (The value will be always -999.0 unless N9077A-AFP installed) 47.
Page 830 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 56. Packet Extension Duration (us) ( it will be -999.0 if radio std is NOT 11ax or 11be) 57. Guard Interval of Trigger-based PPDU Guard Interval (us) ( it will be -999.0 if radio std is NOT 11ax or 11be) 58.
Page 831 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 68. Partial Burst Power Avg(dBm) if the Firmware Version is below A.36 Minor or Radio Std is not 11n/ac/ax/be, returns -999.0, which means Invalid. Valid when Radio Std is 11agjp if Radio Std Detection is auto, but invalid if Radio Std Detection is Manual EVM vs.
Page 832 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned If radio standard is 11ah and PPDU format is greater than or equal to 2 MHz short format, returns the decode bits of SIG fields which length is 48 bits If radio standard is 11ah and PPDU format is 1MHz short format, returns the decode bits of SIG fields which length is 36 bits If radio standard is 11af, returns the decode bits of VHT-SIG-A and VHT_SIG_B Signal.
Page 833 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned – MIMO Usage Type is TXBForming (available when the required license V9077B-KFP/KTP is installed) Otherwise, returns -999.0 For EXM E6640A / EXF E6650A Returns Tx Beam Forming Calibrated Magnitude Ratio values as comma separated floating point vectors of Tx channels, when –...
Page 834 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned BPSK QPSK 16QAM 64QAM 256QAM 1024QAM 4096QAM (Please note 1024QAM is 6 instead of 5) 6. DCM ( 1 means with DCM, 0 means without) 7. Coding ( 1 means LDPC, 0 means BCC) 8.
Page 835 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 5. Modulation Format 6. DCM ( 1 means with DCM, 0 means without) 7. Coding ( 1 means LDPC, 0 means BCC) 8. RU Size of each user 9. Start SubCarrier Index for the RU allocation 10.
Page 836 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 31. Power(dBm) 32. EVM(dB) 33. EVM pass fail 34. Date Rate (Mbps) 35. RU Index 36. IQGainImbalance (dB) 37. IQQuadratureError(degree) 38. IQTimingSkewError (picoseconds) 39. PoweMax(dBm) 40. PowerMin(dBm) For User 2: 41.
Page 837 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 57. IQQuadratureError(degree) 58. IQTimingSkewError (picoseconds) 59. PoweMax(dBm) 60. PowerMin(dBm) …… For User N: ( User 0 is the first user) – 20*N+1. STA-ID – 20*N+2. Nsts ( number of spatial streams) –...
Page 838 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned Unused Tone Error Note that these results are available only if radio standard is 802.11ax and the PPDU format is HE trigger- based, or radio standard is 802.11be and the PPDU format is EHT trigger-based The returned results are unused tone results 1.
Page 839 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned It will return EHT-SIG contents for channel 1 which is defined by 11be specification The returned values are float, each float number represents one bit ( i.e., 1.0 means bit 1 and 0.0 means bit EHT-SIG contents contains common field and user specific field For non-OFDMA transmission, common field include U-SIG overflow bits and Number of non-OFDMA users For EHT Sounding NDP, common field include U-SIG overflow bits, CRC and Tail...
Page 840 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned Radio Returned Values Standard 11ax 80+80 on the number of users) The definitions of RU2, RU4, RU6 and RU8 refer to 802.11ax specification HE-SIG-B part For 802.11be It will return EHT-SIG contents for channel 2 which is defined by 11be specification The returned values are float, each float number represents one bit ( i.e., 1.0 means bit 1 and 0.0 means bit EHT-SIG contents contains common field and user specific field For non-OFDMA transmission, common field include U-SIG overflow bits and Number of non-OFDMA users...
Page 841 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 4. Subcarrier stop index 5. Unused Tone Error (dB) 6. Pass/Fail 7. Limits (dB) 8. Margin (dB) 9. -999.0(Reserved) 10. -999.0(Reserved) 11. -999.0(Reserved) 12. -999.0(Reserved) The total results are: 1.
Page 842 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 17. -999.0(Reserved) 18. -999.0(Reserved) 19. -999.0(Reserved) 20. -999.0(Reserved) For 2 RU-26 21. RU-26 index 22. m 23. Subcarrier start index 24. Subcarrier stop index 25. Unused Tone Error (dB) 26.
Page 843 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned – 9+12*(N-1)+9. -999.0(Reserved) – 9+12*(N-1)+10. -999.0(Reserved) – 9+12*(N-1)+11. -999.0(Reserved) The results corresponding to Burst info window of Burst & Sig Info view The results will be available except 802.11bg, otherwise it will return one value -999.0 The total number of results is 10 + Number of Burst Info Type * 5 The first 10 results are: 1.
Page 844 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned Returned Value Radio Standard IEEE802_11ax160M IEEE802_11be20M IEEE802_11be40M IEEE802_11be80M IEEE802_11be160M IEEE802_11be320M 2. Standard Mode Returned Value Standard Mode StdModeNonHT StdModeHT_MM StdModeHT_GF StdModeVHT StdModeHE_SU StdModeHE_MU StdModeHE_EXT StdModeHE_TRIG_BASED StdModeHE_TRIG_FRAME StdModeHE_SU_Sounding_NDP StdModeHE_TRIG_BASED_NDP StdModeEHT_MU StdModeEHT_TRIG_BASED StdModeEHT_Sounding_NDP -999...
Page 845 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned Returned Standard Format Meaning Value Std80211n40GF An IEEE 802.11n HT-greenfield 40 MHz signal was found Std80211n40MM An IEEE 802.11n HT-mixed Mode 40 MHz signal was found Std80211ac40DL An IEEE 802.11 40 MHz non-HT Duplicate signal was found Std80211ac20 An IEEE 802.11ac 20 MHz VHT signal was found...
Page 846 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 5. HTSigStatus Returned Value HTSigStatus Meaning HdrStatNone No Header expected HdrStatUnk Unknown status HdrStatNotFound Expected Header but didn’t find it HdrStatErrBits Invalid bits found HdrStatErrCRC Checksum failed HdrStatOK 6. LsigStatus Returned Value LsigStatus Meaning...
Page 847 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned Returned Value LsigStatus Meaning HdrStatNone No Header expected HdrStatUnk Unknown status HdrStatNotFound Expected Header but didn’t find it HdrStatErrBits Invalid bits found HdrStatErrCRC Checksum failed HdrStatOK If radio standard is 11ah, returns -999.0 9.
Page 848 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 10+(Burst Info Type N – 1 ) * 5 +2: Modulation Format 10+(Burst Info Type N – 1 ) * 5 +3: Length (Symbol) 10+(Burst Info Type N – 1 ) * 5 +4: Power (dBm) 10+(Burst Info Type N –...
Page 849 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned Returned Burst Info Type Value BurstInfoTypeHELTF BurstInfoTypeHEData BurstInfoTypeEHTUSIG1 BurstInfoTypeREHTUSIG1 BurstInfoTypeEHTUSIG2 BurstInfoTypeREHTUSIG2 BurstInfoTypeEHTSIG BurstInfoTypeEHTSTF BurstInfoTypeEHTLTF BurstInfoTypeEHTData Modulation Format is defined as follows: BPSK QPSK 16QAM 64QAM 256QAM 1024QAM 4096QAM (Please note 1024QAM is 6 instead of 5) WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 850 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned User Info Summary including PSDU CRC Note that these results are available only if radio standard is 802.11ax/11be The returned results are users’ information summary, including SIG-B user specific information and some other information such as EVM, power, etc.
Page 851 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 24. -999.0 (reserved) 25. -999.0 (reserved) 26. -999.0 (reserved) 27. -999.0 (reserved) 28. -999.0 (reserved) 29. -999.0 (reserved) 30. -999.0 (reserved) Modulation Format is represented by integer, the integer can be translated by: BPSK QPSK 16QAM...
Page 852 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 12. EVM(dB) 13. EVM pass fail 14. Date Rate (Mbps) 15. RU Index 16. IQGainImbalance (dB) 17. IQQuadratureError(degree) 18. IQTimingSkewError (picoseconds) 19. PoweMax(dBm) 20. PowerMin(dBm) 21. PSDU CRC (1 means Fail, 0 means Pass, -999 means Invalid), (if the Firmware Version is below A.22.00, it returns Invalid.
Page 853 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 38. RU Size of each user 39. Start SubCarrier Index for the RU allocation 40. Stop SubCarrier Index for the RU allocation 41. Power(dBm) 42. EVM(dB) 43. EVM pass fail 44.
Page 854 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 64. MCS Index 65. Modulation Format 66. DCM ( 1 means with DCM, 0 means without) 67. Coding ( 1 means LDPC, 0 means BCC) 68. RU Size of each user 69.
Page 855 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned For User N: ( User 0 is the first user) – 20*N+1. STA-ID – 20*N+2. Nsts ( number of spatial streams) – 20*N+3. TxBeamforming ( 1 means to apply steering matrix, 0 means otherwise) –...
Page 856 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned – 20*N+27. reserved(-999.0) – 20*N+28. reserved(-999.0) – 20*N+29. reserved(-999.0) – 20*N+30. reserved(-999.0) Decoded bits for each user. It’ only available for 802.11n/ac/ax/af/be Note that, if the Firmware Version is prior to A.23.00 or the version of N9077EM1x-1FP is prior to 2109.0228, it returns -999.0 The first value is the user number to indicate how many users the decoded bits are for If the user number = N, then from 2nd to (N + 1)th values indicate the decoded bits number for each user...
Page 857 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned … – N+1. bits number for Nth user – N+2. the CRC status for 1st user – … – 2N+1. the CRC status for Nth user – 2N+2. the first integer16 for decoded bits –...
Page 858 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned each subframe for the 2 user. (1 means Fail, 0 means Pass, -999 means Invalid. Pass/Fail indicator is valid when Data Decode is ON) … From (3N + 2M + 2M +…...
Page 859 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 9216 … 7253 The integers from 9216 to 7253 are totally 800/16 = 50 values As you convert the 50 values, you can get 800 bits, for example 9216 = 00100100 00000000, it is 16 bits, and from b0 to b15, then 2 integer can be converted to another 16 bits, from b16 to b31, etc.
Page 860 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned … 3N+2M +… M +1. CRC of subframe M1 for the 1 user 3N+2M + …M +2. CRC of subframe 1 for the 2 user … 3N+2M + …M +1.
Page 861 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned Returned Value Radio Standard IEEE802_11ac20M IEEE802_11ac40M IEEE802_11ac80M IEEE802_11acTwo80M IEEE802_11ac160M IEEE802_11ah1M IEEE802_11ah2M IEEE802_11ah4M IEEE802_11ah8M IEEE802_11ah16M IEEE802_11jp10M IEEE802_11P5M IEEE802_11af6M IEEE802_11af7M IEEE802_11af8M IEEE802_11ax20M IEEE802_11ax40M IEEE802_11ax80M IEEE802_11axTwo80M IEEE802_11ax160M IEEE802_11be20M IEEE802_11be40M IEEE802_11be80M IEEE802_11be160M IEEE802_11be320M 2.
Page 862 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned Returned Value Standard Mode StdModeHE_EXT StdModeHE_TRIG_BASED StdModeHE_TRIG_FRAME StdModeHE_SU_Sounding_NDP StdModeHE_TRIG_BASED_NDP StdModeEHT_MU StdModeEHT_TRIG_BASED StdModeEHT_Sounding_NDP -999 StdModeUnknown 3. Standard Format If radio standard is either of 11a/11n/11ac/11af/11ax/11be, Returned Standard Format Meaning Value Std80211a A non-HT (Legacy) 20 MHz IEEE 802.11a signal was found...
Page 863 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned Returned Standard Format Meaning Value Std80211ax80 An IEEE 802.11ax 80 MHz VHT signal was found Std80211ax160 An IEEE 802.11ax 160 MHz VHT signal was found Std80211be20 An IEEE 802.11be 20 MHz EHT signal was found Std80211be40 An IEEE 802.11be 40 MHz EHT signal was found Std80211be80...
Page 864 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned Returned Value LsigStatus Meaning HdrStatUnk Unknown status HdrStatNotFound Expected Header but didn’t find it HdrStatErrBits Invalid bits found HdrStatErrCRC Checksum failed HdrStatOK 7. SigAStatus / U-SigStatus If radio standard is either of 11n/11ac/11af/11ax, it’s SigAStatus If radio standard is 11be, it’s U-SigStatus.
Page 865 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned Otherwise, it returned -999. 10. PSDU CRC 1: Fail 0: Fass -999: Invalid 11. Detected gamma phase rotation for radio std 11be 320MHz. It’s only valid for radio std 11be 320MHz, the firmware version is greater than or equal to A.33.00 and N9077EM2E option is 2022.0801 or later, otherwise it will return -999.
Page 866 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 27. Modulation format 28. Length (Symbols) 29. Power (dBm) 30. EVM (dB) … … … 20+(Burst Info Type N – 1 ) * 5 +1: Burst Type Info N 20+(Burst Info Type N –...
Page 867 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned Returned Burst Info Type Value BurstInfoTypeVHTSIGA1 BurstInfoTypeVHTSIGA2 BurstInfoTypeVHTSIGA2 BurstInfoTypeVHTSIGB BurstInfoTypeVHTSIGB BurstInfoTypeVHTData BurstInfoTypeVHTData BurstInfoTypeGTSTF BurstInfoTypeRLSIG BurstInfoTypeHESIGA1 BurstInfoTypeRHESIGA1 BurstInfoTypeHESIGA2 BurstInfoTypeRHESIGA2 BurstInfoTypeHESIGB BurstInfoTypeHESTF BurstInfoTypeHELTF BurstInfoTypeHEData BurstInfoTypeEHTUSIG1 BurstInfoTypeREHTUSIG1 BurstInfoTypeEHTUSIG2 BurstInfoTypeREHTUSIG2 BurstInfoTypeEHTSIG WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 868 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned Returned Burst Info Type Value BurstInfoTypeEHTLTF BurstInfoTypeEHTData Modulation Format is defined as follows: BPSK QPSK 16QAM 64QAM 256QAM 1024QAM 4096QAM (Please note 1024QAM is 6 instead of 5). EHT-SIG channel 1 contents for the second 80M The results will not be available unless radio standard is 802.11be 160/320 The definition is same as READ:EVM32 for 11be EHT-SIG channel 2 contents for the second 80M...
Page 869 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned EHT-SIG channel 2 contents for the third 80M The results will not be available unless radio standard is 802.11be 320 The definition is same as READ:EVM33 for 11be EHT-SIG channel 1 contents for the fourth 80M The results will not be available unless radio standard is 802.11be 320 The definition is same as READ:EVM32 for 11be EHT-SIG channel 2 contents for the fourth 80M...
Page 870 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 11. Chip Clock Error Max (ppm) 12. Chip Clock Error Avg (ppm) 13. I/Q Origin Offset Max (dB) 14. I/Q Origin Offset Avg (dB) 15. Gain Imbalance Max 16. Gain Imbalance Avg 17.
Page 871 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 38. Peak Burst Power Avg(dBm) 39. Peak-to-Avg Burst Power Ratio Max 40. Peak-to-Avg Burst Power Ratio Avg 41. Data Modulation Format ** 42. Data Bit Rate (Mbits/s) 43. Burst Number analyzed in the last acquisition 44.
Page 872 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Index: n Results Returned 5. Test result of Chip clock error (Avg) Return the demod bits of PLCP Preamble Return the demod bits of PLCP Header * when the input is BBIQ, this number will be -999.0 ** this result will return integer numbers, 0 represents DSSS1, 1 represents DSSS2, 2 represents CCK5.5, 3 represents CCK11, 4 represents PBCC5.5, 5 represents PBCC11, 6 represents PBCC22, 7 represents PBCC33.
Page 873 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Burst & Signal Info is not available for 802.11b/g (DSSS/CCK/PBCC). NOTE Preamble Freq Error is not available for 802.11b/g(DSSS/CCK/PBCC) and NOTE 802.11af. IQ Impairments is not available for 802.11a/g/j/p(OFDM), 802.11b/g NOTE (DSSS/CCK/PBCC) and 802.11af. User Information Summary is only available for 802.11ax/be.
Page 874 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement View Name String ID Numeric ID View Description Gain Imbalance vs. Carrier graph IQ Quadrature Skew vs. Carrier graph and IQ Time Skew vs. Carrier graph USERinfo User Information Provides the MCS, Modulation Format, Summary(11ax) Power, EVM and RU size for each user UTERror...
Page 875 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Some of these Views are multiple-window Views. When in a multiple-window View, you select a window by touching it. The menu controls may sometimes change depending on which window is selected. Whenever the View changes, the default menu is Frequency, unless otherwise specified in the View description.
Page 876 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement 3.6.1.1 I/Q Measured Polar Graph This view has the following windows: – I/Q Measured Polar Graph – Numeric Results :DISP:EVM:VIEW POLor Example 3.6.1.2 I/Q Error This view has the following windows: – EVM Graph –...
Page 877 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement 3.6.1.5 Numeric Results This view has the following window: – Numeric Results :DISP:EVM:VIEW NRES Example 3.6.1.6 Burst & Signal Info This view has the following windows: – Burst Info – Signal Info :DISP:EVM:VIEW BHTS Example 3.6.1.7 Preamble Freq Error This view has the following window:...
Page 878 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement 3.6.1.9 User Information Summary (11ax) This view has the following windows: – User Information Summary – HE-SIG-B User Field – HE-SIG-B Common Field :DISP:EVM:VIEW USER Example 3.6.1.10 Unused Tone Error This view has the following windows: –...
Page 879 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement 3.6.2 Windows The following windows are available in the Modulation Analysis measurement. You can select a different window display in the drop-down box by tapping the window name on the upper left corner of each window. Window Number I/Q Polar Metrics...
Page 880 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Marker Operation Corresponding Trace n=1 IQ Polar Metric trace In Numeric Results, – “Avg” means the average of the individual measurements when averaging is on. – “Max” means the maximum of the individual measurements when averaging is –...
Page 881 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement 3.6.2.5 Phase Error The Phase Error window appears in the following View: View Size Position I/Q Error Half, half width Upper right Marker Operation Yes (Chips - Phase) Corresponding Trace n=6 Phase Error Trace 3.6.2.6 I/Q Error Metrics The I/Q Error Metrics window appears in the following View: View...
Page 882 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement 3.6.2.9 OFDM EVM Metrics The Numeric Results window appears in the following View: View Size Position OFDM EVM Half, half width Lower right Marker Operation Corresponding Trace None 3.6.2.10 Demod Bits The Demod Bits window appears in the following View: View Size Position...
Page 883 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement 3.6.2.13 Signal Info The Signal Info window appears in the following View: View Size Position Burst & Signal Info Half, full width Bottom Marker Operation Corresponding Trace None U-Sig No The U-SIG content shall be identical in each non-punctured 20 MHz subchannels within each 80 MHz subblock, while it can be different in each 80 MHz subblocks when BW is greater than 80MHz.
Page 884 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement covers both the short training sequence and the long training sequence(channel estimation sequence), the length will be 16us. When the Sync type parameter is set to Long (Channel Estimation Sequence), Preamble Frequency Error covers only the channel estimation sequence, the length will be 8us.
Page 885 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement 3.6.2.17 User Information Summary The User Info Summary window appears in the following Views: View Size Position User Information Summary (11ax) One thirds, full width User Information Summary (11be) One thirds, full width Marker Operation Corresponding Trace n=29 User Info Summary trace...
Page 886 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement 3.6.2.21 Unused Tone Error Metrics The Unused Tone Error Metrics window appears in the following View: View Size Position Unused Tone Error One half, full width Lower Marker Operation Corresponding Trace n=31 Unused Tone Error trace 3.6.2.22 Power vs.
Page 887 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement 3.6.3 Amplitude Activates the Amplitude menu and selects Reference Level or Reference Value as the active function, depending on the measurement. Some features in this menu apply to multiple measurements. Some other features apply only to specific measurements and their controls are blanked or grayed-out in measurements that do not support the feature.
Page 888 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :DISP:EVM:WIND3:TRAC:Y:RLEV 10 dBm Example :DISP:EVM:WIND3:TRAC:Y:RLEV? Preset The preset values for different windows are defined as follows: Window Number Preset Magnitude Error 0.0% Phase Error 0.0°(deg) EVM vs. Chips 0.0% EVM vs. Symbol 0.0 dB EVM vs.
Page 889 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Window Number EVM vs. Carrier 250.0 dB Preamble Freq Error 5.0 kHz I/Q Gain Imbalance 250.0 dB I/Q Quadrature Skew 36000.0°(deg) Unused Tone Error 250.00 dBm Power vs. Symbol 250.0 dBm Scale/Div For measurements that support a logarithmic Y-Axis, Scale/Div sets the height of one division of the graticule in the current Y-Axis unit.
Page 890 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Window Number Preset Phase Error 7.5°(deg) EVM vs. Chips 1.5% EVM vs. Symbol 10.0 dB EVM vs. Carrier 10.0 dB Preamble Freq Error 1.0 kHz I/Q Gain Imbalance 10.0 dB I/Q Quadrature Skew 7.5°(deg) Unused Tone Error 10.0 dBm...
Page 891 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :Window :Number :Magnitude Error :Phase Error :EVM vs. Chips :EVM vs. Symbol :EVM vs. Carrier :Preamble Freq Error :I/Q Gain Imbalance :I/Q Quadrature Skew :Unused Tone Error :Power vs. Symbol :DISP:EVM:WIND3:TRAC:Y:RPOS CENT Example :DISP:EVM:WIND3:TRAC:Y:RPOS? Preset The preset values for different windows are defined as follows:...
Page 892 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :DISPlay:EVM:WINDow3|4|5|7|8|14|15|16|20:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:COUPle 0 | 1 | OFF | Remote Command :DISPlay:EVM:WINDow3|4|5|7|8|14|15|16|20:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:COUPle? The applicable windows are numbered as follows: :Window :Number :Magnitude Error :Phase Error :EVM vs. Chips :EVM vs. Symbol :EVM vs. Carrier :Preamble Freq Error :I/Q Gain Imbalance :I/Q Quadrature Skew :Unused Tone Error...
Page 893 Meas Preset. Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are disabled, as the expected input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control.
Page 894 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Note that Configuration 2 is not strictly speaking a dual-section attenuator, since there is no electronic section available. However, it behaves exactly like Configuration 1 without the Electronic Attenuator Option EA3, therefore for the sake of this document it is grouped into the “Dual-Attenuator”...
Page 895 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Full Range Atten This control and Attenuator Summary only appear in N9041B, when the RF input is selected, the RF Input Port is set to RF Input 2, and the Full Range Attenuator is installed.
Page 896 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Mech Atten Labeled Mech Atten in Dual-Attenuator models, and Atten in Single-Attenuator models. In the Dual-Attenuator configuration, this control only affects the mechanical attenuator. Lets you modify the attenuation applied to the RF input signal path. This value is normally auto-coupled to Ref Level, "Internal Preamp"...
Page 897 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement 7.5 GHz to above 7.5 GHz, the attenuation setting changes to a multiple of 10 dB that is no smaller than the previous setting. For example, 4 dB attenuation changes to 10 dB Preset Auto The Auto value is 10 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state 0 dB...
Page 898 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man As described under "Attenuation" on page 1750, there are two distinct attenuator configurations available in the X-Series, the Single Attenuator and Dual-Attenuator configurations. In Dual-Attenuator configurations, we have mechanical attenuation and electronic attenuation, and current total attenuation is the sum of electronic + mechanical attenuation.
Page 899 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement This control includes an Enable/Disable toggle switch; it is only possible to enter a value for the Electronic Attenuator when this switch is in the Enable position. For more details of the Electronic Attenuator, see "More Information"...
Page 900 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Transition Rules" on page 901 Preset 0 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state 0 dB Dual-Attenuator configuration: 24 dB Single-Attenuator configuration: the total of ATT and EATT cannot exceed 50 dB. So, if the EATT is set to 24 dB first, the main attenuation cannot be greater than 26 dB and will be reduced accordingly;...
Page 901 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Mechanical Attenuator Transition Rules When the Electronic Attenuator is enabled, the Mechanical Attenuator transitions to a state that has no Auto function. Below are the rules for transitioning the Mechanical Attenuator. Note that the information below only applies to the Dual- Attenuator configurations, and only when the Electronic Attenuator is installed: When the Electronic Attenuation is enabled from a disabled state: –...
Page 902 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Using the Electronic Attenuator: Pros and Cons The electronic attenuator offers finer steps than the mechanical attenuator, has no acoustical noise, is faster, and is less subject to wear. The “finer steps” advantage of the electronic attenuator is beneficial in optimizing the alignment of the instrument dynamic range to the signal power in the front panel as well as remote use.
Page 903 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement – Electric attenuator only – Combination of Electric attenuator and Mechanical attenuator when [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize IMMediate is executed. [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:TYPE EONLy | COMBined Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:TYPE? :POW:RANG:OPT:TYPE EONL Example :POW:RANG:OPT:TYPE? Dependencies Does not appear in the Swept SA, RTSA, Monitor Spectrum and Complex Spectrum measurements Appears in the Waveform measurement in BASIC and 5G NR Modes COMBined Preset...
Page 904 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Notes The parameter option ELECtrical sets this function to in Single-Attenuator models The parameter option COMBined is mapped to ELECtrical in Single-Attenuator models. If you send COMBined, it sets the function to and returns ELEC to a query For SCPI compatibility with models that do not have an input attenuator, the...
Page 905 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Single-Attenuator Models Dual-Attenuator models "Adjust Atten for Min Clipping" on page 1759 "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 903 selection is Mech + Elec Atten: WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 906 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 907 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 903 selection is Elec Only. Note that the Mech Atten value is not adjusted, and the value previously set is used. Therefore, there is a case that IF Overload is still observed depending on the input signal level and the Mech Atten setting.
Page 908 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:STEP[:INCRement]? :POW:ATT:STEP 2 Example :POW:ATT:STEP? Notes Has a toggle control on the front panel, but takes a specific value (in dB) when used remotely. The only valid values are 2 and 10 Dependencies Blanked in EXA, CXA and CXA-m if option FSA (2 dB steps) is not present.
Page 909 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Not all measurements support Range Auto/Man. If Auto is not supported in the current measurement, this control is grayed-out, displaying Man, and returned to a SCPI query, but this does not change the Auto/Man setting for Range. When you switch to a measurement that supports Auto, it goes back to Auto if it was previously in Auto mode.
Page 910 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :VOLT:IQ:RANG? Notes The numeric entries are mapped to the smallest gain range whose break point is greater than or equal to the value, or 1 V Peak if the value is greater than 1 V Couplings When "Q Same as I"...
Page 911 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Q Range The internal gain range for the Q channel. Q Range only applies to Input Path Q Only and Ind I/Q. For input I+jQ "I Range" on page 1766 determines both I and Q channel range settings.
Page 912 "Q Range" on page 1768 Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state OFF|ON Range 3.6.3.4 Range (Non-attenuator models) Only available for Keysight’s modular signal analyzers and certain other Keysight products, such as VXT and M941xE. State Saved WLAN Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 913 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Range Represents the amplitude of the largest sinusoidal signal that could be present within the IF without being clipped by the ADC. For signals with high peak-to- average ratios, the range may need to exceed the rms signal power by a significant amount to avoid clipping.
Page 914 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:ATTenuation? Notes Because there is no attenuator control available in these models, the control displays only choices. However, for SCPI compatibility with other platforms, all three parameters (ELECtrical, COMBined, and ON) are honored and all are mapped to ELECtrical, so if any of these three parameters is sent, a subsequent query will return ELEC Dependencies...
Page 915 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement via SCPI, but is not changeable. In such applications the control is grayed-out. Attempts to change the value via SCPI are ignored, but no error message is generated Dependencies Does not appear in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Preset VXT Models M9410A/11A 0 dB...
Page 916 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement This tab does appear in VXT Models M9410A/11A/15A/16A and M9410E/11E/15E/16E, because "Software Preselection" on page 1788 is under this tab, and VXT Models M9410A/11A/15A/16A and M9410E/11E/15E/16E implement a version of Software Preselection. Presel Center Adjusts the centering of the preselector filter to optimize the amplitude accuracy at the frequency of the selected marker.
Page 917 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement dependencies subsequent measurement has completed, nor are results returned in response to :READ :MEASure queries Measuring bit remains set (true) while this command is operating, and does not go false until the subsequent sweep/measurement has completed Proper Preselector Operation Certain considerations should be observed to ensure proper operation: 1.
Page 918 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement – Does not appear in VXT Models M9410A/11A/15A/16A – Does not appear in M9410E/11E/15E/16E – Grayed-out if microwave preselector is off – Grayed-out if entirely in Band 0, that is, if Stop Freq is lower than about 3.6 GHz –...
Page 919 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Selection Example Note :POW:GAIN OFF Low Band :POW:GAIN ON Sets the internal preamp to use only the low band. The frequency range of the installed (optional) low-band :POW:GAIN:BAND preamp is displayed in square brackets on the Low Band selection in the dropdown Full Range :POW:GAIN ON...
Page 920 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement When the USB Preamp is connected to USB, the Preamp annotation says “Preamp: USB” if the internal preamp is off or “Preamp: USB, Int” if the internal preamp is on (only for measurements that support the USB preamp) Auto Function [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1...
Page 921 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement More Information When LNA is installed, the preamp annotation changes to show the state of both LNA and Internal Preamp. Below is an example: Note that when operating entirely in the low band (below about 3.6 GHz), if LNA is on, Internal Preamp is switched off (even if you have its switch set to ON).
Page 922 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement without giving the best possible noise floor. The preamp, if purchased and used, gives better noise floor than does Low Noise Path Enable, but the preamp’s compression threshold and third-order intercept are much poorer than that of Low Noise Path Enable.
Page 923 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement In any of these cases, if the required options are not present and the SCPI command is sent, error - 241, "Hardware missing; Option not installed" is generated Low Noise Path Enable and Full Bypass Enable are grayed-out if the current measurement does not support them Low Noise Path Enable and Full Bypass Enable are not supported in Avionics and MMR Modes (non- modulation measurements).
Page 924 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement This allows the function to automatically switch based on certain Auto Rules as shown below: VMA Mode Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Digital Demod Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and IFBW > 15 MHz, in which case choose Preselector Bypass Monitor Spectrum Always Presel Bypass...
Page 925 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Modulation Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and IFBW > 15 MHz, in Analysis which case choose Full Bypass if conditions warrant(FBP Option is available and “Allow Full Bypass in Auto”...
Page 926 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Low Noise Path Enable Low Noise Path Enable provides a lower noise floor under some circumstances, particularly when operating in the 21–26.5 GHz region. With the Low Noise Path enabled, the low band/high band switch and microwave preamp are bypassed whenever all the following are true: –...
Page 927 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement range of the preamp path is too little and the noise floor of the standard path is too high, the Low Noise Path can provide the best dynamic range The graph below illustrates the concept. It shows, in red, the performance of an instrument at different attenuation settings, both with the preamp on and off, in a measurement that is affected by both instrument noise and instrument TOI.
Page 928 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement µW Preselector Bypass Toggles the preselector bypass switch for band 1 and higher. When the microwave presel is on, the signal path is preselected. When the microwave preselector is off, the signal path is not preselected. The preselected path is the normal path for the instrument.
Page 929 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement interface. Also, if the preamp is turned on, the Low Noise Path is not used, whether or not the Full Bypass Enable is selected in the user interface. The only time the Low Noise Path is used is when Full Bypass Enable is selected, the sweep is completely in High Band (>...
Page 930 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Preselector and Bandwidth Conflict When the Frequency Extender Preselector is applied and the signal bandwidth is greater than 2.5 [GHz], then a settings alert message will show to warn the user that the signal may be distorted due to the limitation of the Frequency Extender Preselector bandwidth.
Page 931 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :POW:MW:PATH:AUTO:FULL ON Example :POW:MW:PATH:AUTO:FULL? Dependencies Only appears if Option FBP is installed, and in the following measurements – 5GNRMode: Modulation Analysis and IQ Waveform – WLAN Mode: IQ Waveform – Channel Quality Mode: Group Delay and Noise Power Ratio Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state...
Page 932 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement used for other inputs and never for frequencies below 50 GHz. This is why the label of this control contains the parenthetical note “(>~50 GHz)”. Note that for N9042B+V3050A, in the Swept SA measurement, Software Preselection works even if the measurement is using an FFT Sweep Type.
Page 933 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement SW Preselection Type Specifies the algorithm used for software preselection. Two hidden sweeps occur in succession. The second sweep is offset in LO frequency by 2 * IF / N. For each point in each trace, the smaller amplitude from the two traces is taken and placed in that point in the selected trace.
Page 934 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement bandwidth up to around 3 GHz. (Default/Preset setting). When making FFT measurements, this algorithm is not used, instead the same algorithm is used as NARRow (below) – NARRow– a software preselection algorithm is used which takes two background acquisitions, then post-processes the result to detect and remove images from wideband signals with occupied bandwidths up to 2 GHz.
Page 935 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Enable High Freq Prefilter for the Swept SA Measurement in Mode: :SAN:PFIL ON Dependencies Only appears in VXT models M9410A/11A with center frequency above 1310 MHz, and M9410E/11E in frequency range 1310MHz~5GHz Preset "Prefilter Presets" on page 935 below State Saved Saved in instrument state...
Page 936 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement 3.6.4.1 Settings Contains the basic Bandwidth functions. In most measurements it is the only tab under BW. Info BW Enables you to specify the information bandwidth for the analyzer. This is used to set the hardware filter of the ADC.
Page 937 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement if Radio Std is 802.11be-20M = 25MHz if Radio Std is 802.11be-40M = 40MHz if Radio Std is 802.11be-80M = 80MHz if Radio Std is 802.11be-160M = 160MHz if Radio Std is 802.11be-320 = 320MHz State Saved Saved in instrument state 1 kHz...
Page 938 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement M941xE-B4X = 400.0 MHz M941xE-B8X = 800.0 MHz M941xE-B12 = 1.2 GHz M941xAU-B6X = Upgrade from 400.0 MHz to 800.0 MHz M941xAU-B12 = Upgrade from 400.0 MHz to 1.2 GHz M941xAU-BU2 = Upgrade from 800.0 MHz to 1.2 GHz All other models: B1Y=160 MHz, B1X=140 MHz, B1A=125 MHz, B85= 85 MHz, B40=40 MHz, B25=25 MHz, else 10 When Info BW auto coupled by Radio Std exceeds max BW of hardware, there will be an error...
Page 939 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :DISP:EVM:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:POL? Couplings Default Value is coupled with Radio Std Preset If Radio Std is 802.11a/g/j/p (OFDM), 801.11g (DSSS-OFDM), 802.11n, 802.11ac/ax/be, 802.11ah, or 802.11af: CONS If Radio Std is 802.11b/g (DSSS/CCK/PBCC): VC State Saved Saved in instrument state I/Q Points Specifies the number of I/Q Points displayed for the I/Q measured polar graph.
Page 940 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Meas Interval – I/Q Points I/Q Rotation Toggles the display rotation function between On and Off. If set to On, the I/Q polar vector or I/Q polar constellation graph is rotated from 0 to 359.5 degrees. :DISPlay:EVM:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:ROTation <real>...
Page 941 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement U-Sig No The U-SIG content shall be identical in each non-punctured 20 MHz subchannels within each 80 MHz subblock, while it can be different in each 80 MHz subblocks when BW is greater than 80MHz. You can choose ‘U-SIG No’...
Page 942 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement 3.6.5.2 View See Section "Views" on page 872"Views" on page 872. View Contains controls for selecting the current View, and for editing User Views. User View Lets you choose a View from the saved User Views for the current measurement. This panel only appears if a User View exists for the current measurement.
Page 943 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Restore Layout to Default Restores the Layout to the default for Basic. Modified Views are very temporary; if you exit the current measurement they are discarded, and they are not saved in State. To retain this View for later use, and to be able to return easily to your original Basic View, you can save your edited View as a “User View”.
Page 944 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :DISP:VIEW:ADV:REN “Baseband” Example <alphanumeric> Notes is case insensitive; you can specify mixed case, however the name will be evaluated on a single case If the <alphanumeric> specifying the new name is already present in the list of View names, the error message “-224, Illegal parameter value;...
Page 945 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement nodes, :DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] and :DISPlay:VIEW:NSEL, are retained for backwards compatibility, but they only support predefined views. View Listing Query Returns a string containing a comma-separated list of names for all the Views, including User Views, available for the current Measurement. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:CATalog? Remote Command...
Page 946 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Graticule Turns the display graticule On or Off for all windows with graticules in all measurements in the current Mode. Also turns the graticule Y-Axis annotation on and off. :DISPlay:GRATicule[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :DISPlay:GRATicule[:STATe]?
Page 947 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Trace Annotation Turns on and off the labels on the traces, showing their detector (or their Math Mode) as described in the Trace section, for all windows in all measurements in the current Mode for which Trace Annotation on/off is supported. If Trace Math is being performed on a trace, then the Trace Math annotation replaces the detector annotation.
Page 948 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :DISP:ANN:MBAR OFF Example Dependencies Grayed out and forced to when System Display Settings, Annotation is Preset This remains through a Preset when System Display Settings, Annotation is set to State Saved Saved in instrument state Display Enable (Remote Command Only) Turns the display on/off, including the display drive circuitry.
Page 949 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Name Command :INSTrument:SCReen:DELete:ALL Delete All But This Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:CREate Add Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:REName Rename Screen :SYSTem:SEQuencer Sequencer On/Off :DISPlay:ENABle OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :DISPlay:ENABle? :DISP:ENAB OFF Example Couplings :DISP:ENAB OFF turns Backlight :DISP:ENAB ON turns Backlight ON, but changing...
Page 950 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Center Frequency Sets the frequency that corresponds to the horizontal center of the graticule (when frequency Scale Type is set to linear). While adjusting the Center Frequency the Span is held constant, this means that both Start Frequency and Stop Frequency will change.
Page 951 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement "RF Center Freq " on page 953 "Ext Mix Center Freq " on page 954 "I/Q Center Freq " on page 955 State Saved Saved in instrument state Depends on instrument maximum frequency, mode, measurement, and selected input.. "RF Center Freq "...
Page 952 3.755 GHz 7.5 GHz 7.575 GHz F13 (CXA-m) 6.805 GHz 13.6 GHz 13.8 GHz F26 (CXA-m) 13.255 GHz 26.5 GHz 26.55 GHz 504 (M9421A, M8920A) 2.145 GHz 3.88GHz 3.88 GHz 506 (M9421A, M8920A) 3.245 GHz 6.08GHz 6.08 GHz F06 (M9410A/11A) 1.0 GHz 6.08 GHz 6.08 GHz...
Page 953 The following table shows the Center Frequency Presets and Range for VXT modes with Radio Heads/CIU. Products with Radio Heads/CIU Preset Start frequency Stop frequency M9421A + CIU 6 GHz 5.9 GHz 12 GHz M9410A + CIU 6 GHz 5.9 GHz...
Page 954 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :FREQ:RF:CENT? Notes This command is the same in all modes, but the parameter is Measurement Global. So, the value is independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode Dependencies If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set Center Frequency such that the Stop Frequency would be >3.6 GHz fails and results in an advisory message.
Page 955 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement harmonic range in the Harmonic Table. The Center Freq thus presets to the point arithmetically equidistant from these two frequencies Note that, if the current measurement has a limited Span available to it, and cannot achieve the Span shown in the table (Span=Stop Freq –...
Page 956 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Note that the SCPI command will set this center frequency even if radio standard is NOT 802.11ac/ax 80+80MHz. [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:SEGMent1 <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:SEGMent1? :FREQ:CENTer:SEGM1 5.53 GHz Example :FREQ:CENTer:SEGM1? Notes For an 80+80 MHz channel, the Segment 1 will be the lower or upper segment. The center frequency of this Segment1 is independent from the center frequency of Segment2 SEM measurement will rearrange the Segment 1 and Segment 2 based on their center frequency, and will generate a “setting conflict”...
Page 957 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Depends on instrument maximum center frequency Same as Center Frequency CF Step Changes the step size for the center frequency and start and stop frequency functions. Once a step size has been selected and the center frequency function is active, the step keys (and the UP|DOWN parameters for Center Frequency from remote commands) change the center frequency by the step-size value.
Page 958 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON Example :FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO? Preset 3.6.7 Marker Accesses a menu that enables you to select, set up and control the markers for the current measurement. If there are no active markers, Marker selects marker 1, sets it to Normal and places it at the center of the display.
Page 959 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Marker X Set the X Axis value of the selected marker in the current X Axis Scale unit. If the marker mode is off, the SCPI command has no affect other than to cause the marker to become selected.
Page 960 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement The entered value in Trace Points is immediately translated into the current NOTE domain units for setting the value of the marker. The marker’s value in domain units, NOT trace points, is preserved if a change is made to the X Axis scale settings.
Page 961 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Pressing the Delta key causes the selected marker to become a delta marker if it is not already. Also, the selected marker's reference is affected as follows: If the reference marker was off, it is turned on as a normal marker. The reference marker is moved to the trace of the selected marker and set to the same position as the selected marker.
Page 962 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Normal | DELTa (D) | Off Backwards Compatibility SCPI Commands Sets or queries the state of a marker. Setting a marker that is OFF to state ON or 1 puts it in Normal mode and places it at the center of the screen.
Page 963 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement the trace that marker is on), and the X Axis value of the marker being moved (in the same fundamental x-axis units). :CALCulate:EVM:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :CALCulate:EVM:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe]? :CALC:EVM:MARK:COUP ON Example :CALC:EVM:MARK:COUP?
Page 964 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement 3.6.7.3 Peak Search The controls on this tab allow you to move the marker to selected peaks of the signal, giving you enormous analysis capabilities, particularly when combined with the Delta Marker function. Pressing the Peak Search hardkey automatically moves you to the Peak Search NOTE page of the Marker menu AND performs a Peak Search.
Page 965 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Next Pk Right Moves the selected marker to the nearest peak right of the current marker that meets all enabled peak criteria. If there is no valid peak to the right of the current marker position, a “No peak found”...
Page 966 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Pk-Pk Search Finds and displays the amplitude and frequency (or time, if in zero span) differences between the highest and lowest y-axis value. It places the selected marker on the minimum value on its selected trace. And it places that marker’s reference marker on the peak of its selected trace.
Page 967 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Marker X "Marker X" on page 959, on the Settings tab. Relative To Selects the marker to which the selected marker is relative (its reference marker). Every marker has another marker to which it is relative. This marker is referred to as the “reference marker”...
Page 968 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :CALCulate:EVM:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:TRACe? :CALC:EVM:MARK:TRAC EVM Example :CALC:EVM:MARK:TRAC? Notes UTERror is available if the Radio Std is 802.11ax, otherwise grayed-out PSYMbol is available if the Radio Std is 802.11n, 802.11ac or 802.11ax, otherwise grayed-out POLar Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Range...
Page 969 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :EVM:AVER:COUN 1 Example :EVM:AVER:COUN? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state 10000 Averaging On/Off Turns averaging on or off. [:SENSe]:EVM:AVERage[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command [:SENSe]:EVM:AVERage[:STATe]? :EVM:AVER OFF Example :EVM:AVER? Couplings As Radio Std Detection is set to Auto, Average State is coupled to...
Page 970 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Segment Number Selects the segment to be analyzed. Couplings Available when Radio Std is set to 802.11ac/ax 80+80MHz State Saved Saved in instrument state Meas Setup Summary Table Lets you view and access many of the parameters in the Meas Setup menus on one screen.
Page 971 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement – IQ Normalize – Multi-Carrier Filter – Spectrum Else You can set up the following parameters on the same page. – Clock Adjust – Track Phase – Reference Filter – Reference Filter Alpha/BT –...
Page 972 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement EVM Optimization Method “Optimize EVM” is an immediate action, before the action, the EVM Optimization NOTE Method should be selected. There are 2 methods for EVM Optimization – Normal method is to adjust hardware settings to minimize EVM by some algorithm which is dependent on the measured peak power of input signal –...
Page 973 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Spur Avoidance Because the VXT models M9410A/11A/15A/16A and M9410E/11E/15E/16E are direct-conversion (zero-IF) receivers, feedthrough leakage from the local oscillator appears as a spurious signal (spur) at the center frequency. The Spur Avoidance function is provided to eliminate this spur, at the expense of some measurement speed.
Page 974 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Option Max Digital IF BW 600 MHz 1200 MHz Center frequency limitation: Center Frequency Max Digital IF BW 330 MHz ~ 380 MHz (CF - 330 MHz) * 2 380 MHz ~ 550 MHz 100 MHz 550 MHz ~ 1310 MHz 200 MHz...
Page 975 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Option Maximum IF BW 600 MHz 1200 MHz Center Frequency Limitation: Center Frequency Maximum IF BW 1 MHz ~ 10 MHz (Option LFE) 500 kHz 10 MHz ~ 20 MHz (Option LFE) 5 MHz 20 MHz ~ 60 MHz (Option LFE) 10 MHz 60 MHz ~ 80 MHz (Option LFE)
Page 976 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Center Frequency Maximum IF BW 1310 MHz ~ 2000 MHz 600 MHz 2000 MHz ~ 25.9 GHz 1200 MHz 25.9 GHz ~ 26.5 GHz Min(Max BW by option, 2*(26.5 GHz-Center Freq)) Auto Leveling Performs auto-leveling for EVM measurements.
Page 977 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Value SCPI Unit of Notes returned :CALCulate:EVM:LEVel:TIME? Max Packet second Queries the max Length packet length :CALC:EVM:LEV:TIME? :CALCulate:EVM:LEVel:POINt? None Queries the Symbol/Chip number of the :CALC:EVM:LEV:POIN? Used max symbol/chip used in the burst. For 11b/g, this value is the total number of chips.
Page 978 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement would set RBW to Auto "behind the scenes" so that, on exit from Zero Span, it would be in Auto. Any Auto/Man selection specific (local) to the other measurements in the current Mode are not affected by Auto Couple. Any functions that are not coupled with other instrument parameters, such as ranging or leveling variables, such as AutoRange or AutoScale, are not affected.
Page 979 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement – Resolution Bandwidth – Fundamental Frequency – Dwell Time – Range Table Resolution Bandwidths – Range Table Dwell Times Meas Preset Restores all the measurement parameters to their default values. :CONFigure:EVM Remote Command :CONF:EVM Example 3.6.8.2 Radio...
Page 980 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Auto Detection is not recommended for Multi-Carrier signals Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Radio Std In this menu, 7 groups of WLAN standards can be selected: 1. 802.11a/b/g/j/p includes 802.11a/g/j/p,802.11b/g,802.11g DSSS-OFDM, 802.11j/p 10M, 802.11p 5M 2.
Page 981 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state Range 802.11a/g/j/p (OFDM 20M) | 802.11b/g (DSSS/CCK/PBCC) | 802.11g (DSSS-OFDM) | 802.11n (20 MHz) | 802.11n (40 MHz) | 802.11ac (20 MHz) | 802.11ac (40 MHz) | 802.11ac (80 MHz) | 802.11ac (80 + 80MHz)| 802.11ac (160MHz) | 802.11ah(1MHz) | 802.11ah(2MHz) | 802.11ah(4MHz) | 802.11ah (8MHz) | 802.11ah(16MHz) | 802.11j/p (OFDM 10M) | 802.11p (OFDM 5M) | 802.11af (6MHz)|802.11af (7Mhz) | 802.11af (8MHz) | 802.11ax (20 MHz) | 802.11ax (40 MHz) | 802.11ax (80 MHz) | 802.11ax (80 +...
Page 982 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement AUTO | BPSK | QPSK | 16QAM | 64QAM | SIG Radio Std = 802.11ac 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz, 80+80 MHz, 160 MHz AUTO | BPSK | QPSK | 16QAM | 64QAM | 256QAM | 1024QAM | 4096QAM | SIG Radio Std = 802.11ah 1 MHz, 2 MHz, 4 MHz AUTO | BPSK | QPSK | 16QAM | 64QAM | 256QAM | SIG Radio Std = 802.11ah 8 MHz, 16 MHz...
Page 983 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Radio Std <radio_ <options> std> AUTO|BPSK|QPSK|QAM16|QAM64|QAM256|SIG 802.11ah 1 MHz AUTO|BPSK|QPSK|QAM16|QAM64|QAM256|SIG 802.11ah 2 MHz AUTO|BPSK|QPSK|QAM16|QAM64|QAM256|SIG 802.11ah 4 MHz AUTO|BPSK|QPSK|QAM16|QAM64|QAM256|SIG 802.11ah 8 MHz AH16 AUTO|BPSK|QPSK|QAM16|QAM64|QAM256|SIG 802.11ah 16 MHz AUTO|BPSK|QPSK|QAM16|QAM64|QAM256|SIG 802.11af 6 MHz AUTO|BPSK|QPSK|QAM16|QAM64|QAM256|SIG 802.11af 7 MHz AUTO|BPSK|QPSK|QAM16|QAM64|QAM256|SIG 802.11af 8 MHz AX20...
Page 984 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:GDO:SUBCarrier:SPACing <freq> [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:GDO:SUBCarrier:SPACing? Radio Std = 802.11j/p(OFDM 10 MHz) [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:JP10:SUBCarrier:SPACing <freq> [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:JP10:SUBCarrier:SPACing? Radio Std = 802.11p(OFDM 5 MHz) [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:P5:SUBCarrier:SPACing <freq> [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:P5:SUBCarrier:SPACing? Radio Std = 802.11n 20 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:N20:SUBCarrier:SPACing <freq> [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:N20:SUBCarrier:SPACing? Radio Std = 802.11n 40 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:N40:SUBCarrier:SPACing <freq>...
Page 985 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AH4:SUBCarrier:SPACing? Radio Std = 802.11ah 8 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AH8:SUBCarrier:SPACing <freq> [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AH8:FORMat? Radio Std = 802.11ah 16 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AH16:SUBCarrier:SPACing <freq> [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AH16:SUBCarrier:SPACing? Radio Std = 802.11af 6 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AF6:SUBCarrier:SPACing <freq> [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AF6:SUBCarrier:SPACing? Radio Std = 802.11af 7 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AF7:SUBCarrier:SPACing <freq>...
Page 986 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Radio Std = 802.11be 80 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:BE80:SUBCarrier:SPACing <freq> [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:BE80:SUBCarrier:SPACing? Radio Std = 802.11be 160 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:BE160:SUBCarrier:SPACing <freq> [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:BE160:SUBCarrier:SPACing? Radio Std = 802.11be 320 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:BE320:SUBCarrier:SPACing <freq> [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:BE320:SUBCarrier:SPACing? Example Radio Std = 802.11a/g/j/p(OFDM 20 MHz) :DEM:AG:SUBC:SPAC 312.5 kHz :DEM:AG:SUBC:SPAC? Radio Std = 802.11g(DSSS-OFDM)
Page 987 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :DEM:ACT80:SUBC:SPAC 312.5 kHz :DEM:ACT80:SUBC:SPAC? Radio Std = 802.11ac 160 MHz :DEM:AC160:SUBC:SPAC 312.5 kHz :DEM:AC160:SUBC:SPAC? Radio Std = 802.11ah 1 MHz :DEM:AH1:SUBC:SPAC 312.5 kHz :DEM:AH1:SUBC:SPAC? Radio Std = 802.11ah 2 MHz :DEM:AH2:SUBC:SPAC 312.5 kHz :DEM:AH2:SUBC:SPAC? Radio Std = 802.11ah 4 MHz :DEM:AH4:SUBC:SPAC 312.5 kHz...
Page 988 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :DEM:AX80:SUBC:SPAC? Radio Std = 802.11ax 80+80 MHz :DEM:AXT80:SUBC:SPAC 312.5 kHz :DEM:AXT80:SUBC:SPAC? Radio Std = 802.11ax 160 MHz :DEM:AX160:SUBC:SPAC 312.5 kHz :DEM:AX160:SUBC:SPAC? Radio Std = 802.11be 20 MHz :DEM:BE20:SUBC:SPAC 312.5 kHz :DEM:BE20:SUBC:SPAC? Radio Std = 802.11be 40 MHz :DEM:BE40:SUBC:SPAC 312.5 kHz :DEM:BE40:SUBC:SPAC? Radio Std = 802.11be 80 MHz...
Page 989 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Radio Std Value 802.11ac 40 MHz 312.5 kHz 802.11ac 80 MHz 312.5 kHz 802.11ac 80+80 MHz 312.5 kHz 802.11ac 160 MHz 312.5 kHz 802.11ah 1 MHz 31.25 kHz 802.11ah 2 MHz 31.25 kHz 802.11ah 4 MHz 31.25 kHz 802.11ah 8 MHz...
Page 990 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:N20:GINTerval? Radio Std = 802.11n 40 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:N40:GINTerval R1B4 | R1B8 | SIG | OTHer [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:N40:GINTerval? Radio Std = 802.11ac 20 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AC20:FORMat AUTO | BPSK | QPSK | QAM16 | QAM64 | QAM256 | QAM1024 | SIG [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AC20:GINTerval? Radio Std = 802.11ac 40 MHz...
Page 991 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AF6:GINTerval? Radio Std = 802.11af 7 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AF7:GINTerval R1B4 | R1B8 | SIG | OTHer [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AF7:GINTerval? Radio Std = 802.11af 8 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AF8:GINTerval R1B4 | R1B8 | SIG | OTHer [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AF8:GINTerval? Example Radio Std = 802.11a/g/j/p(OFDM 20 MHz) :DEM:AG:GINT R1B4 :DEM:AG:GINT? Radio Std = 802.11b/g(DSSS/CCK/PBCC)
Page 992 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Radio Std = 802.11ac 80+80 MHz :DEM:ACT80:GINT R1B4 :DEM:ACT80:GINT? Radio Std = 802.11ac 160 MHz :DEM:AC160:GINT R1B4 :DEM:AC160:GINT? Radio Std = 802.11ah 1 MHz :DEM:AH1:GINT R1B4 :DEM:AH1:GINT? Radio Std = 802.11ah 2 MHz :DEM:AH2:GINT R1B4 :DEM:AH2:GINT? Radio Std = 802.11ah 4 MHz...
Page 993 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement R1B4|R1B8|OTHer Radio Std = 802.11j/p(OFDM 5 MHz) R1B4|R1B8|OTHer Radio Std = 802.11n 20 MHz R1B4|R1B8|SIG|OTHer Radio Std = 802.11n 40 MHz R1B4|R1B8|SIG|OTHer Radio Std = 802.11ac 20 MHz R1B4|R1B8|SIG|OTHer Radio Std = 802.11ac 40 MHz R1B4|R1B8|SIG|OTHer Radio Std = 802.11ac 80 MHz R1B4|R1B8|SIG|OTHer...
Page 994 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement When "Guard Interval Selection (Radio Std NOT 802.11b/g(DSSS/CCK/PBCC) or 802.11ax/be)" on page 1504 is set to Other, this value is available and used as Guard Interval. Remote Radio Std = 802.11a/g/j/p(OFDM 20 MHz) Command [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AG:GINTerval:LENGth <real>...
Page 995 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AH1:GINTerval:LENGth? Radio Std = 802.11ah 2 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AH2:GINTerval:LENGth <real> [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AH2:GINTerval:LENGth? Radio Std = 802.11ah 4 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AH4:GINTerval:LENGth <real> [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AH4:GINTerval:LENGth? Radio Std = 802.11ah 8 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AH8:GINTerval:LENGth <real> [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AH8:GINTerval:LENGth? Radio Std = 802.11ah 16 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AH16:GINTerval:LENGth <real>...
Page 996 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Radio Std = 802.11n 40 MHz :DEM:N40:GINT:LENG 0.25 :DEM:N40:GINT:LENG? Radio Std = 802.11ac 20 MHz :DEM:AC20:GINT:LENG 0.25 :DEM:AC20:GINT:LENG? Radio Std = 802.11ac 40 MHz :DEM:AC40:GINT:LENG 0.25 :DEM:AC40:GINT:LENG? Radio Std = 802.11ac 80 MHz :DEM:AC80:GINT:LENG 0.25 :DEM:AC80:GINT:LENG? Radio Std = 802.11ac 80+80 MHz...
Page 997 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :DEM:AF7:GINT:LENG 0.25 :DEM:AF7:GINT:LENG? Radio Std = 802.11af 8 MHz :DEM:AF8:GINT:LENG 0.25 :DEM:AF8:GINT:LENG? Preset 0.25 State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max 0.0078125 / 1.0 HE Subcarrier Spacing (Radio Std 802.11ax) Specifies the HE subcarrier frequency spacing of the input signal. This parameter must match the actual HE subcarrier frequency spacing of the input signal, otherwise demodulation will fail.
Page 998 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement :DEM:AX80:HESC:SPAC 78.125 kHz :DEM:AX80:HESC:SPAC? Radio Std = 802.11ax 80+80 MHz :DEM:AXT80:HESC:SPAC 78.125 kHz :DEM:AXT80:HESC:SPAC? Radio Std = 802.11ax 160 MHz :DEM:AX160:HESC:SPAC 78.125 kHz :DEM:AX160:HESC:SPAC? Preset 78.125 kHz State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max 1 Hz / 1.25 MHz HE Guard Interval Selection (Radio Std 802.11ax) Specifies the guard interval (also called cyclic extension) length for each symbol...
Page 999 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement Example Radio Std = 802.11ax 20 MHz :DEM:AX20:GINT R1B4 :DEM:AX20:GINT? Radio Std = 802.11ax 40 MHz :DEM:AX40:GINT R1B4 :DEM:AX40:GINT? Radio Std = 802.11ax 80 MHz :DEM:AX80:GINT R1B4 :DEM:AX80:GINT? Radio Std = 802.11ax 80+80 MHz :DEM:AXT80:GINT R1B4 :DEM:AXT80:GINT? Radio Std = 802.11ax 160 MHz...
Page 1000 3 WLAN Mode 3.6 Modulation Analysis Measurement [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AXT80:GINTerval:LENGth <real> [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AXT80:GINTerval:LENGth? Radio Std = 802.11ax 160 MHz [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AX160:GINTerval:LENGth <real> [:SENSe]:DEMod[:WLAN]:AX160:GINTerval:LENGth? Example Radio Std = 802.11ax 20 MHz :DEM:AX20:GINT:LENG 0.25 :DEM:AX20:GINT:LENG? Radio Std = 802.11ax 40 MHz :DEM:AX40:GINT:LENG 0.25 :DEM:AX40:GINT:LENG? Radio Std = 802.11ax 80 MHz :DEM:AX80:GINT:LENG 0.25 :DEM:AX80:GINT:LENG? Radio Std = 802.11ax 80+80 MHz...

This manual is also suitable for:

E6680a E6680e E6681a E7515b M9410a M9411a ... Show all